Ume Pd300 Eng

PD300 MULTIFUNCTION PROTECTION
Instruction Manual
UME_PD300_eng Rev.: R (03/11)

All rights reserved. No part of this
publication may be reproduced by whatever
means, without the prior written permission of
Ingeteam T&D.
Ingeteam T&D reserves the right to make any
changes without prior notice.
INDEX
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ..........................................................................................................................................7

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Manual scope ....................................................................................................................................................7

Functions ..........................................................................................................................................................7
Model coding .....................................................................................................................................................9
User interface ..................................................................................................................................................10
Hardware Configurations ...................................................................................................................................10
Environmental conditions ..................................................................................................................................12
Tests ..............................................................................................................................................................12
1.7.1 Electrical tests ........................................................................................................................................12
1.7.2 Environmental tests .................................................................................................................................13
1.7.3 Mechanical tests .....................................................................................................................................13
1.8 Wiring diagrams ...............................................................................................................................................14
1.9 Accuracy .........................................................................................................................................................21
1.9.1 Trafos saturation .....................................................................................................................................21
2. HARDWARE...........................................................................................................................................................22
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
Constructive characteristics. Horizontal box (PD300H)......................................................................................... 22

Constructive characteristics. Vertical box (PD300V) ............................................................................................. 22
Constructive characteristics. TCP mounted ......................................................................................................... 22
Rear terminals .................................................................................................................................................23
Options for rear communications ports: .............................................................................................................. 24
RS485 connection detail between some units ..................................................................................................... 25
Ethernet Communication ..................................................................................................................................25
2.7.1 Ethernet by GOF .....................................................................................................................................25
2.7.2 Ethernet through RJ45 cable .................................................................................................................... 26
2.8 Technical characteristics ..................................................................................................................................26
2.8.1 Auxiliary power supply voltage .................................................................................................................. 26
2.8.2 Output contacts ......................................................................................................................................27
2.8.3 Digital inputs (optoisolated) ..................................................................................................................... 27
2.8.4 IRIG-B input...........................................................................................................................................27
2.8.5 Phase and neutral current circuits (rated current 1/5 A) .............................................................................. 28
2.8.6 Voltage circuits .......................................................................................................................................28
2.9 Operating frequency .........................................................................................................................................29
2.10 Phase order ...................................................................................................................................................29
3. UNIT CONFIGURATION ..........................................................................................................................................30

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
Programming of digital AND LOGICAL inputs ...................................................................................................... 30

Flicker treatment in the digital inputs ................................................................................................................ 31
Programming of digital outputs ..........................................................................................................................32
Programming of LEDs .......................................................................................................................................33
Programming of logic outputs ............................................................................................................................33
Programming General Settings ..........................................................................................................................34
Differential Protection General setting Programming ............................................................................................ 34
Communication Configuration............................................................................................................................35
3.8.1 Front door Communication (Port 1_1) and rear port no. 2 (Port 1_2) ............................................................ 35
3.8.2 Communication via rear port n 1 (Port 2) .................................................................................................. 35
3.8.3 Ethernet Communication .........................................................................................................................37
3.9 Other configuration settings ..............................................................................................................................38
3.9.1 Frequency ..............................................................................................................................................38
3.9.2 Language ...............................................................................................................................................38
3.9.3 Phase order ............................................................................................................................................38
3.9.4 Pushbuttons enabling and lockings by commands ...................................................................................... 38
3.9.5 Power supply supervision enabling ............................................................................................................ 38
3.9.6 External power supply supervision ............................................................................................................. 38
3.9.7 Temperature supervision ..........................................................................................................................38
3.9.8 Calibration .............................................................................................................................................38
3.9.9 Display contrast setting............................................................................................................................39
4. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS. DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS ....................................................................................... 40

4.1 Protection function locking ...............................................................................................................................40
4.2 Differential protection.......................................................................................................................................40
4.2.1 Percent characteristic ..............................................................................................................................41
4.2.2 Harmonic restraint ..................................................................................................................................41
Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

PD300 User Manual
III
INDEX
4.2.3 Instantaneous differential ........................................................................................................................42
4.2.4 Function 86 ...........................................................................................................................................43
4.3 Restricted earth protection ................................................................................................................................43
4.3.1 Winding 1/ Winding 2 ..............................................................................................................................43
4.3.2 Autotransformer ......................................................................................................................................43
4.4 Phase overcurrent protection .............................................................................................................................44
4.4.1 General description .................................................................................................................................44
4.4.2 Range of settings for timed characteristics (6 tables) .................................................................................. 44
4.4.3 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (low level) (6 tables) ....................................................... 45
4.4.4 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (high level) (6 tables) ..................................................... 45
4.5 Residual overcurrent protection .........................................................................................................................45
4.5.2 Settings ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables) .................................................................................. 46
4.5.4 Setting ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (high level) (6 tables) ....................................................... 46
4.6 Current unbalance protection ............................................................................................................................46
4.6.2 Setting ranges for time unit characteristics (6 tables) ................................................................................. 47
4.6.3 Setting range for instantaneous characteristics (6 tables) ............................................................................ 47
4.7 Neutral overcurrent protection ...........................................................................................................................47
4.7.2 Range of settings for timed characteristic (6 tables) ................................................................................... 47
4.7.4 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (high level) (6 tables) ..................................................... 48
4.8 Overvoltage Protection ......................................................................................................................................48
4.8.2 Settings ranges of the time characteristic (6 tables).................................................................................... 49
4.8.3 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (6 tables) . .................................................................... 49
4.9 UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION ........................................................................................................................49
4.9.2 Settings ranges of the time characteristic (6 tables).................................................................................... 50
4.9.3 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (6 tables) ...................................................................... 50
4.10 Overexcitation protection ................................................................................................................................51
4.10.1 5th harmonic .........................................................................................................................................51
4.10.2 V/f .......................................................................................................................................................51
4.11 Frequency protection ......................................................................................................................................51
4.11.1 Minimum frequency ..............................................................................................................................52
4.11.2 Maximum frequency ..............................................................................................................................52
4.12 Thermal Image...............................................................................................................................................52
4.12.1 Heating curves ......................................................................................................................................54
4.12.2 Cooling curves ......................................................................................................................................55
4.13 Breaker .........................................................................................................................................................56
4.13.1 Breaker failure protection.......................................................................................................................56
4.13.2 Operation Logic ....................................................................................................................................57
4.13.3 Breaker supervision ...............................................................................................................................57
4.13.4 Coil supervision ....................................................................................................................................57
5. DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTION ..............................................................................................................................59
5.1 Events reports..................................................................................................................................................59
5.2 Fault records ...................................................................................................................................................62
5.3 Measurements .................................................................................................................................................62
5.3.1 Measurements at the secondary ................................................................................................................ 63
5.3.2 Measurements at the primary ................................................................................................................... 64
5.4 Measurement historical report ...........................................................................................................................64
5.5 Statistical data ................................................................................................................................................65
5.6 Protection status ..............................................................................................................................................65
5.6.1 By keyboard / display ...............................................................................................................................65
5.6.2 Through PC (Protections Console) ............................................................................................................. 65
5.7 Oscillograph data recorder ................................................................................................................................66
6. OTHER FUNCTIONS...............................................................................................................................................67
6.1 Time setting and synchronization .......................................................................................................................67
6.1.1 Time setting ...........................................................................................................................................67
6.1.2 Synchronization ......................................................................................................................................67

PD300 User Manual
IV
INDEX
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
Control messages .............................................................................................................................................67

Local/Remote command ...................................................................................................................................68
Commands by keyboard ....................................................................................................................................68
Power supply supervision ..................................................................................................................................69
External power supply supervision ......................................................................................................................69
Temperature supervision ...................................................................................................................................69
7. OPERATION MODE ................................................................................................................................................70

7.1 Through keyboard/display..................................................................................................................................70
7.1.1 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................................70
7.1.2 Elements of the keyboard /display unit ...................................................................................................... 70
7.1.3 Operating mode ......................................................................................................................................71
7.2 Using the PC ...................................................................................................................................................73
8. RECEPTION, STORAGE, INSTALLATION AND TESTS ................................................................................................ 74
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
Reception and storage ......................................................................................................................................74

Connecting procedure .......................................................................................................................................74
Unit addressing ...............................................................................................................................................75
Commissioning ................................................................................................................................................75
APPENDIX I.
DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT CALCULATION .......................................................................................... 76
I.1. 2-winding models ............................................................................................................................................77

I.2. 3-winding models ............................................................................................................................................78
APPENDIX II.
GENERATOR PROTECTION ............................................................................................................... 82
APPENDIX III.
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY .......................................................................................................................84
APPENDIX IV.
CURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS ......................................................................................... 111
IV.1. Curves CEI 255-4./.BS142 ........................................................................................................................... 111

IV.2. ANSI Curves ................................................................................................................................................ 124
IV.3. User curves ................................................................................................................................................. 133
APPENDIX V.
LIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS......................................................................................................... 135
V.1. Digital signals ............................................................................................................................................... 135

V.2. Measurements .............................................................................................................................................. 139
V.3. Commands ................................................................................................................................................... 140
APPENDIX VI.
LOGIC DIAGRAMS .......................................................................................................................... 142
APPENDIX VII.
DNP 3.0 RTU PROTOCOL ............................................................................................................... 154
VII.1. Settings ..................................................................................................................................................... 154

VII.2. Operation indications .................................................................................................................................. 156
VII.2.1 Spontaneous message indicating RESTART ........................................................................................... 156
VII.2.2 Synchronization .................................................................................................................................. 156
VII.2.3 Treatment and detection of digital changes ............................................................................................ 156
VII.2.4 Transfer of spontaneous messages ........................................................................................................ 156
VII.2.5 Particular aspects of the operation ........................................................................................................ 156
VII.3. Device Profile Document .............................................................................................................................. 157
VII.4. Implementation table .................................................................................................................................. 158
VII.5. Signal lists ................................................................................................................................................. 160
VII.5.1 Digital signals ..................................................................................................................................... 160
VII.5.2 Analogue measurements ...................................................................................................................... 160
VII.5.3 Commands ......................................................................................................................................... 160
APPENDIX VIII.
MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL ......................................................................................................... 161
VIII.1. Protocol characteristics .............................................................................................................................. 161

VIII.1.1 Messages format ................................................................................................................................ 161
VIII.1.2 MODBUS Functions ........................................................................................................................... 161
VIII.1.3 Message examples ............................................................................................................................. 162
VIII.1.4 Unit status request............................................................................................................................. 165
VIII.1.5 Change request of digital signals ......................................................................................................... 166
VIII.1.6 Data request by user map ................................................................................................................... 167
VIII.1.7 Synchronization ................................................................................................................................. 167
VIII.1.8 Commands execution ......................................................................................................................... 168
VIII.1.9 Error codes ........................................................................................................................................ 168
VIII.2. Parameters ................................................................................................................................................ 168

PD300 User Manual
INDEX
VIII.3. Unit addresses map ................................................................................................................................... 169
VIII.4. Data formats.............................................................................................................................................. 170
APPENDIX IX.
IEC 870-5-101 RTU PROTOCOL...................................................................................................... 173
IX.1. Settings ...................................................................................................................................................... 173

IX.2. Tables ......................................................................................................................................................... 176
IX.3. Interoperability profile IEC 870 5 101 ...................................................................................................... 179
IX.3.1 System or device (specific parameter of the system) ................................................................................ 179
IX.3.2 System configuration (system specific parameter).................................................................................... 179
IX.3.3 Physical layer (system specific parameter) .............................................................................................. 179
IX.3.4 Link layer (system specific parameter) .................................................................................................... 180
IX.3.5 Application layer .................................................................................................................................. 181
IX.3.6 Application basic functions ................................................................................................................... 185
APPENDIX X.
X.1.
X.2.
X.3.
X.4.
X.5.
IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL ......................................................................................................... 188
870-5-103 Communication Protocol Function ................................................................................................. 188

Settings ....................................................................................................................................................... 189
Control signals .............................................................................................................................................. 190
Control analogue measurements...................................................................................................................... 190
Commands ................................................................................................................................................... 190
APPENDIX XI.
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL ................................................................................................................... 191
XI.1. Introduction................................................................................................................................................. 191

XI.2. Previous steps to configure the device ............................................................................................................ 192
XI.2.1 IED Import to project ............................................................................................................................ 193
XI.3. Protection Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 194
XI.3.1 IED Properties ..................................................................................................................................... 194
XI.3.2 Communications .................................................................................................................................. 194
XI.3.3 Datasets .............................................................................................................................................. 196
XI.3.4 Report Control Blocks (RCB) ................................................................................................................. 198
XI.3.5 Goose Control Blocks (GOCB) ................................................................................................................ 198
XI.3.6 Goose Subscription............................................................................................................................... 199
XI.3.7 Settings .............................................................................................................................................. 200
XI.3.8 Commands .......................................................................................................................................... 200
XI.3.9 Private parts ........................................................................................................................................ 201
XI.4. Protection update ......................................................................................................................................... 202
APPENDIX XII.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................................... 203
XII.1. Failure detection ......................................................................................................................................... 203

XII.2. Error handling procedure ............................................................................................................................. 204
APPENDIX XIII.
RECEPTION TESTS ................................................................................................................... 205
XIII.1. Material needed ......................................................................................................................................... 205

XIII.2. Measurement tests ..................................................................................................................................... 205
XIII.2.1 Measurements in display .................................................................................................................... 205
XIII.2.2 Measurements in Console ................................................................................................................... 205
XIII.3. Protection functions ................................................................................................................................... 205
XIII.3.1 Hardware status ................................................................................................................................. 205
XIII.3.2 Instantaneous units (current, voltage, frequency)................................................................................... 206
XIII.3.3 Timed units (current, voltage).............................................................................................................. 206
XIII.3.4 Current unbalance units...................................................................................................................... 207
XIII.3.5 Residual current units ........................................................................................................................ 208
XIII.4. Coil supervision ......................................................................................................................................... 208
XIII.5. Display and clock test ................................................................................................................................ 209
XIII.6. Unit time setting ........................................................................................................................................ 209

PD300 User Manual
VI
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The PD 300 family units are multifunctional protection relays of digital technology and they create the basic element used for the
protection, measurement and control for 2 and 3 winding transformers and generator (see appendix). They can be used as
autonomous elements for protection, control and measurement of an electrical bay or they can be integrated inside a Protection
and Control Integrated System.
Inside this family there are different models, which only differ in some hardware points or in its functionality. The Firmware is
common for all the models and the available functions are defined in a programmable logic circuit (PLD) The Firmware can be
load in the unit through the serial port, which makes the version updating easier.
1.1 MANUAL SCOPE

This manual does not correspond to a particular PD300 model, but it refers to the whole family. For each model, it will be
only applied anything related to its physical characteristics and its functionalities. This manual is divided into two sections;
the first one has the information related to configuration, functions and the second one has the appendixes: curves for timed
function operation, communication protocols, and structure of the keyboard/display menus.
On the other hand, each unit is delivered with a summarized Characteristic Sheet in which the functions of that model are
related to its connections diagram.
1.2 FUNCTIONS
Standard functions
Percent differential protection (87) with harmonic restraint (cross-blocking)
Instantaneous differential protection (87)
Three-phase overcurrent protection (50/51, with two instantaneous levels)
Residual overcurrent protection (50N/51N, with two instantaneous levels)
Unbalance protection in phase currents (46)
Breaker failure protection (50BF)
Thermal overload (49)
5th harmonic overexcitation protection (24 5th harmonic)
Breaker supervision
Closing and trip circuit supervision
Functions 2 winding model and generator

Earth-wired overcurrent protection (50G/51G, with two instantaneous levels)
Restricted earth protection (87G)
Frequency protection (5 steps): maximum (81M), minimum (81m)
Overvoltage protection (59)
Undervoltage protection (27)
Overexcitation protection V/f (24 V/Hz)
Functions only in generator

Percent and instantaneous differential protection limited by the frequency range (5Hz)
Percent differential protection without harmonic restraints
Restricted earth protection (87G)
Only Yy connections with schedule time zero.
Measurements

PD300 User Manual
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Phase currents measurements
Earthed measurement (2 winding model and generator)
Phase to earth voltage measurements (2 winding model and generator)
Current maximeter
Data acquisition
Chronological events recording
Chronological faults recording
Maximum and minimum measurement historical recording
Oscillograph data recorder
Other characteristics
Tables of Settings. Except for configuration, which has only one table, there are 6 tables of different settings for the
different groups, one of which is the active or working table at a given moment. The active table selection can be done
either via command by means of the keyboard/display (in "Settings (change)") or via command by means of a message
from the protection Console, or by activating the digital input

PD300 User Manual
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.3 MODEL CODING

Inside the PD300 protection family the following models are defined:
3 winding
87 + 50 + 51 + 50N + 51N + 46 + 50BF + 49 + 24 5th harmonic
2 winding
87 + 87G + 50 + 51 + 50N + 51N + 50G + 51G + 46 + 50BF + 49 + 24 5th
harmonic + 81M/m + 59 + 24V/Hz
Generator
87 + 87G 50 + 51 + 50N + 51N + 50G + 51G + 46 + 50BF + 49 + 24 5th
harmonic + 81M/m + 59 + 24V/Hz. Function 87 is filtered by frequency and
it does not have harmonic restraint.
Coding:

PD300 User Manual
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Transformer location
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
2 winding model
Ia winding 1
Ib winding 1
Ic winding 1
IG1
IG2
Ia winding 2
Ib winding 2
Ic winding 2
V
3 winding model
Ia winding 1
Ib winding 1
Ic winding 1
Ia winding 2
Ib winding 2
Ic winding 2
Ia winding 3
Ib winding 3
Ic winding 3
See the examples about the transformer location in the connection diagrams
1.4 USER INTERFACE

Local. It incorporates a front panel with
16 key keyboard
A 2 line, 16 character display
7 red LED indicators and another one green/red
Connection via RS232 for direct connection to PC. Procome protocol
Remote. Depending on the model, it incorporates, on the rear plate, one or two glass Fibre Optic interfaces (ST type
connector), plastic Fibre Optic, RS232 or RS485 for connecting to a PC, modem or Substation Control Unit (in Integrated
Systems). The protocol can be Procome, DNP3.0, MODBUS, IEC 870-5-101 (except with RS485) or IEC 870-5-103.
Ethernet communication (RJ45, GFO)
It is only applied in those models equipped with an Ethernet port
- PROCOME encapsulated
- Peer to peer communications.
- 61850
IEC 61850 communication options
- Single RJ45 Ethernet
- Single FOC Ethernet
- Double GFO Ethernet redundancy
For serial communication these IEC 61850 models (R-type box) include:
- 1 RS232 port Procome protocol
- 1 GFO (unique option in case of double GFO Ethernet) or RS485 protocol DNP3.0.
1.5 HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS

The Hardware possibilities that define a specific model are the following:
Box type
Horizontal
Vertical
Terminal type
Pin type
For closed terminal

PD300 User Manual
10
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Terminals:
Torque of terminals mounted on the rear panel.
Supply terminals
Minimum: 0.5 Nm (5 in-lb)
Maximum: 0.8 Nm (7 in-lb)
I/O terminals:
Current and voltage terminals (plug-in connector)
Current and voltage terminals (closed terminals)
Terminal wiring
The terminal cables must be made of single-section copper AWG 12 to 18 (4 mm2 to 0.8mm2)
Supply terminals
Section AWG 16 to 14 cables (1.5 to 2 mm2)
I/O terminals:
Section AWG 16 to 14 cables (1.5 to 2 mm2)
Current and voltage terminals
Section AWG 12 cables (4 mm2)
Power supply nominal voltage

125 / 220 Vcc
24 / 48 Vcc
*For more details see 2.8.1.Auxiliary power supply voltaje section.
Current transformer measurement range

Extended (low): 18 up to 160 Vdc
Extended (high): 86 up to 280 Vdc
Restricted 24 Vdc: 18 up to 34 Vdc
Number of digital inputs/outputs

Standard:
8 inputs (5 independent, 3 with a common point)
7 outputs (4 independent, 3 with a common point)
Extended: adds to the standard
9 inputs (6 independent, 3 with a common point)
7 outputs (4 independent, 3 with a common point)
Rear communication
Glass Optical Fiber (GOF)

PD300 User Manual
11
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
GOF + GOF
RS485 + RS232
GOF + Ethernet (RJ45)
Plastic Optcical Fiber (POF)
POF + F POF
Internal Communication for TCP
GOF + Ethernet (OF)
RS232
FOC + RS232
RS232 + Ethernet (RJ45)
RS485
RS232 + RS232
RS485 + Ethernet (RJ45)
In case of having two rear ports, the one mentioned in second place is in parallel with the front RS232 (they occupy the same
port), except if one of the ports is Ethernet.
Analogue inputs
The unit can have up to 9 analogue inputs (through the transformer). The usage of each input is shown in the transformer
location table.
Measurement range of the current transformers

Model
In = 5 A
In = 1 A
2/3 windings
0,1A to 160A
0,02A to 32A
Generratorr
0,02A to 32A
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
-10 to 55 C
-40 to 85 C
up to 95% without condensation
1.7 TESTS
1.7.1 Electrical tests
Measurement of dielectric rigidity
Measurement of insulation resistance
Pulse (shock wave)
HF disturbances
Fast transients(burst)
Electrostatic discharges
Voltage pulses
Micro-cuts
Radiated electromagnetic interference
Immunity to radiated fields
Immunity to conducted radiofrequency signals
Immunity to low frequency magnetic field
s/
s/
s/
s/
s/
s/
s/
s/
s/
s/
s/
s/
IEC255-5, series C (2 kV, 1 minute)

IEC 255-5, > 10 Gigaohms at 500 Vdc
IEC -255-4, appendix E., class III
IEC -255-22-1, class III
IEC 61000-4-4 class IV
IEC 60870-2-1 100ms at 110 Vdc
EN 61000-6-4
IEC 61000-4-3, class III
IEC 61000-4-6, class III
IEC 61000-4-8

PD300 User Manual
12
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.7.2 Environmental tests

Cold
Dry heat
Humid heat
Change of temperature
Operating range
s/ IEC 68-2-1 (-40C)

s/ IEC 68-2-2 (+85C)
s/ IEC 68-2-3 (+70C, 93% relative humidity)
s/ IEC 68-2-14 (-20/70C 2 4-hour-cycles)
-10C. up to 55
1.7.3 Mechanical tests

Vibration test
Shock and bump test
s/ IEC 255-21-1 class I

s/ IEC 255-21-1 class I

PD300 User Manual
13
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.8 WIRING DIAGRAMS

In all of the following diagrams only one of the possible digital inputs and outputs programming (very easy) is shown. See the
possibilities in the section input programming and Output programming
The order of the phase sequence is programmable via keyboard/display (See Other settings- Define protection").
Wiring diagram example.

Pin-type 2-winding models

PD300 User Manual
14
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Closed-type 2-winding models

PD300 User Manual
15
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Pin-type 3-winding models

PD300 User Manual
16
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Closed-type 3-winding models

PD300 User Manual
17
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Pin type generator winding models

PD300 User Manual
18
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Wiring diagram example

Closed type generator winding models

PD300 User Manual
19
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Block diagrams

PD300 User Manual
20
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.9 ACCURACY
Accuracy (permanent status)
Overcurrent units
Pickup and restoration of phases and neutral 3% of the theoretical value or 20mA (the greater of boths)
Time measurement
Accuracy of 5% of the setting or 50ms (the greater of both)
Differential units
Pickup and restoration 5% of the theoretical value or 50mA (the greater of both)
Accuracy in the range 47Hz to 51Hz
Repetitiveness
3% of the operation time or 40ms (the greater of both)
Transitory overreach
<15% for totally inductive lines (typical <10%)
<5% for lines with impedance angle of 70 o or less
Transitory overreach = (Inodc Imaxdc)/ Inodc x100
being:
Inodc = pickup value for current without dc component
Imaxdc = pickup value for current with maximum offset dc
1.9.1 Trafos saturation

In order to assure the working of the CTs, the maximum current of symmetric external fault in the secondary multiplied by
the total load of the secondary ohms, must be below the half of the secondary rated current of the transformer (class of
the CT according to IEEE C57.13).
We must check if the secondary currents of the CT during the maximum symmetric external faults, do not exceed the
maximum allowed current in the trafo, typical of 20xIn.

PD300 User Manual
21
HARDWARE
2. HARDWARE
2.1 CONSTRUCTIVE CHARACTERISTICS. HORIZONTAL BOX (PD300H)
Units external dimensions
2.2 CONSTRUCTIVE CHARACTERISTICS. VERTICAL BOX (PD300V)

2.3 CONSTRUCTIVE CHARACTERISTICS. TCP MOUNTED


PD300 User Manual
22
HARDWARE
2.4 REAR TERMINALS

In the following pictures are showed several models according to its configuration.
In models without inputs and output extensin, there are not the upper connectors: terminals 17 to 32 of X1 connector and
terminals 14 to 28 of X2 connector.
2 and 3 winding model (all for pin type terminals)
2 winding model with closed type terminals for analogue inputs

PD300 User Manual
23
HARDWARE
3 winding model with closed type terminals for analogue inputs
2.5 OPTIONS FOR REAR COMMUNICATIONS PORTS:

Single port
OF (Glass or PLastic)
RS232
RS485
Double port
OF + OF
OF+RS232
RS485+RS232
RS232+RS232
Ethernet+OF
Ethernet+RS485
Ethernet+RS232

PD300 User Manual
24
HARDWARE
2.6 RS485 CONNECTION DETAIL BETWEEN SOME UNITS
Although there is an internal connection in the unit between 1 and 2 pin and between pin number 3 and 4, if a connection is
done on the bus side, as it is shown in the figure, a unit can be removed without causing a loss in the chain continuity.
2.7 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION

2.7.1 Ethernet by GOF
The characteristics of the optical channels are as follows:
Baud rate:
100Mb
Connector:
ST
Optical transmitter:
LED
Optical receiver:
PIN Photodiode
Optical output:
Without modulating.
Work wave length:
Glass c = 1300nm
BER
10-9.
Multimode glass optical fiber:
62.5/125m.

PD300 User Manual
25
HARDWARE
The values consider the temperature range from 20C to +85C.
Losses depending on the Fibre type.
Max. allowed losses Losses Km Connection losses
4 db
0.5 db
Glass 62.5/125m 8 db
The transmission maximum distance is given by:
l=
PP= Losses allowed in the link
PP PC ME
PC= Inset losses of additional connections

ME= Aging margin. 3 db must be considered
= Cable loss in db/Km
Reachable maximum distance:
Under the worst conditions In the best conditions
2 Km
Glass 62.5/125m 1.25 Km
2.7.2 Ethernet through RJ45 cable

Interface through isolated transformer of 600 impedance ohms
Insulation 500 V
Connector RJ45 (female)
Baud rate: 10/100 Mb.
Cable type: Shielded
Cable length: 100 m max
2.8 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

2.8.1 Auxiliary power supply voltage
Power supply technical data:
Auxiliary power supply
24-48 Vdc
Range
Ripple
110-125-220 Vdc
Range
Ripple
Burden
18-60 Vdc
20 % over the rated current
86-280 Vdc
20% over the rated current
8W min/ 18W max
The units have been designed to be installed and run in environments equipped with a safe and stable direct current
supply. The switched, high-capacity power supplies can be used with alternating current within the following limits:
From 18 to 60 Vdc peak values for the 24-48 VDC supply, equivalent to an operating range of 14 Vac to 42
Vac RMS approximately.
From 18 to 280 Vdc peak values for the 110-125-200 VDC supply, equivalent to an operating range of 70 Vac
to 195 Vac RMS approximately.
These units digital inputs are designed to pick up signals in direct current and within specified ranges

PD300 User Manual
26
HARDWARE
The digital outputs can operate both in DC and in AC power supply systems.
The units have been tested and certified to IEC standards for installation and operation in direct current systems. They
have not been tested to AC equipment standards.
2.8.2 Output contacts

Carry (permanent) at 25 C
Make(0.5 s)
Breaking capacity (resistive load)
Breaking capacity (L/R=40 ms)
Relays 1-6 and 8-13

5A
30 A
Relays 7 and 14
5A
30 A
for 220 Vcc
0.4 A
0.15 A
for 125 Vcc

for 48 Vcc
1A
3A
0.4 A
2A
for 220 Vcc
0.2 A
0.1 A
for 125 Vcc

for 48 Vcc
0.5 A
0.5 A
0.3 A
0.5 A
2.8.3 Digital inputs (optoisolated)

Burden: < 3 mA
Model
Operating range (Vdc)
Inactive below (Vdc)
Extended range
Restricted
High
Low
24 Vdc
86 to 280 18 to 160 18 ato34
60
15
15
range
48 Vdc
125 Vdc 220 Vdc
36 ato60 85 to 150 65 to 264
26
60
110
2.8.4 IRIG-B input

Characteristics
Demodulated input, TTL level
Type of cable: 2 shielded wires
Isolation: 500 V

PD300 User Manual
27
HARDWARE
Connections
The input circuit is a 390 ohm serial resistance with an optoacoplator; for a 5 V signal, the approximate burden is 10 mA
The number of units that can be connected in parallel to a generator, depends on its capacity to supply output current; a
typical value can be 70 mA, so 6 units could be connected (although the wire length and type have influence. The wire
must be twisted and screened.
2.8.5 Phase and neutral current circuits (rated current 1/5 A)

Thermal capacity
Continuous
20 A
For 1 second
500 A
For half cycle
1250 A
Burden for In = 5 A
<0.35VA
Burden for In = 1 A
0.02VA
2.8.6 Voltage circuits

Thermal capacity
Continuous
2 Un
For 1 second
5 Un (1 sec.)
3.5 Un (1 min)
Burden for 63.5 V

Burden for 100 V
0.015 VA
0.27 VA

PD300 User Manual
28
HARDWARE
2.9 OPERATING FREQUENCY

Rated: 50 or 60 Hz (programmable). Operating range: fn 5 Hz
2.10 PHASE ORDER

ABC or CBA (programmable)

PD300 User Manual
29
UNIT CONFIGURATION
3. UNIT CONFIGURATION
The settings that are defined next configure the unit, so they are basic.
Some of them are only accessible by keyboard/display; some others are also accessible by Console
All of them are usually of single table (Table 0). By keyboard/display you access to the programming of the table 0 through the menu
Settings (change) by means of the keys .
The differential protection generals are of 6 tables. By keyboard/display you access through the table programming.
3.1 PROGRAMMING OF DIGITAL AND LOGICAL INPUTS

In this kind of units, two types of inputs vare considered: digital inputs (physical, wired in the fields) or logicals (internals). Each
possible input function (for example breaker status)can only be programmed only either as digital or logical, but never both at
the same time.
The digital input programming is as follows:
It is carried out through the console, in the Configuration of digital inputs screen, in the right upper chart.
By keyboard/display: PROG. TABLE 0 - PROG.CONFIG CONFIG. INPUTS
SELECC. N0/NC
INPUTS ACTIV. T.
CONFIG INPUTS allows programming a digital input among the following possibilities:
Breaker status (general and for each breaker)
Close command (general and for each breaker)
Open command (general and for each breaker)
External protection (general and for each breaker)
Close unblocking
Set table 1. If a pulse is received, it sets the settings table 1 as the active table
Set Local/Remote command
Close circuit supervision with 52 open (2 or 3 breakers depending on the model)
Close circuit supervision with 52 closed ( 2 or 3 breakers depending on the model)
Trip circuit supervision with 52 open( 2 or 3 breakers depending on the model)
Trip circuit supervision with 52 closed ( 2 or 3 breakers depending on the model)
Local reposition. It turns off the tripping LEDs and it is equal to recognition for Keyboard/display.
Output reposition. It deactivates the relays programmed as Memorized.
Relay locking. When activating it set the relay out of service, but when it is deactivate the relay state will be the
corresponding to the setting In service.
Instantaneous inhibition. It locks the trips of the instantaneous overcurrent units, but it allows the pick up
Instantaneous inhibition winding 1, 2 or 3. It locks the trips of the instantaneous overcurrent units on the indicated winding,
but it allows the pick up.

PD300 User Manual
30
UNIT CONFIGURATION
Neutral inhibition 1 or 2. It locks the trips of the instantaneous overcurrent units on the indicated neutral, but it allows the
pick up.
Free. The input may be used by the protection for lock out or logical, or it may not be used. In any case, its state may be
transmitted to control.
It should not be programmed more than an input with a certain function.
SELECC. NO/NC. It defines if the input must be interpreted like active when it is viewed closed or when it is viewed open.
Regardless it has been selected NO/NC, the digital inputs programmed in outputs, logics,leds, state signalling are seen at 1
when there is voltage in the input, and at 0 when there is no voltage in the input.
For example, for the status of the circuit breaker, if we use a contact 52a we should program the corresponding input as NO
(when it closes it will indicate closed circuit breaker), while if we use a 52b we should program it as NC (when it opens it will
indicate closed circuit breaker).
INPUT ACTIV. T. (time of activation of inputs). It is a software filter for the activation / deactivation of digital inputs. The HW
filters is of 1 to 2 ms, and it can be extended by software in the number of programmed milliseconds (range 0 to 20 ms.
The programming of digital inputs is the following one:
It is carried out through the console, in the Configuration of digital inputs screen, in the right lower chart.
A logical input is a virtual input(not physical)the state of which depends on the corresponding digital signal( input 1
corresponds to logical signal 1, input 15, to signal 15. its function is the one programmed( the possibilities of programming
are the same as the ones of the digital inputs).
This procedure allows the assignation of relay internal signals to those inputs as if they were wired field signals. Up to 15
logical inputs are allowed( because there are 15 logical signals).
NO/NC selection,active input when the logic is active or inactive.
Delay is not applied to the activation.
Example: if logical input 3 is programmed as breaker state and NO, the unit will consider that the breaker is closed, when
logical sign is inactive.
A certain function must only be programmed as one input. It is not admissible, for example, to program state of the breaker
as a digital input and as a logical input.
3.2 FLICKER TREATMENT IN THE DIGITAL INPUTS

The flicker or bouncing consists of the quick and continuous change of a digital input, usually associated to a failure in the
input contact. This function allows carrying out a control to disable the inputs or digital signals that blinks so as not to interfere
in the system integrated in the control, because when a digital signal is disabled, it does not generate any state change.
This function has 3 settings:
Minimum number of changes to mark NFLICKER fault: Minimum number of changes of a signal that must occur in
TFLICKER seconds (parameter) to consider that the contact is faulty and that this signal is disabled (the changes are not
treated and its state is not refreshed). Value between 0 and 255. Value 0 inhibites the signal disabling treatment due to
blinking.
Minimum number of changes to remove the QFLICKER default mark: Maximum number of changes of a signal that must
occur in TFLICKER seconds (parameter) to consider that the contact is not faulty and that the signal previously disabled is
enabled. Value between 0 and 255. Value 0 inhibites the signal automatic enabling treatment when theblinking
disappears.
Default decision interval (TFLICKER): time nterval, in seconds, for the tretament of the disabling or enabling of the digital
signals by blinking. Value between 1 and 60. If a digital input changes its state more than NFLICKER times in a time of
TFLICKER seconds (parameter) this input is disabled. If the NFLICKER paramater has a value 0, the blinking control is
not carried out.
Once a number of changes higher than the one programmed is detected, the signal is set as invalid, a Procome change is
generated indicating the change into invalid and, from this moment on, changes in this signals are not detected.

PD300 User Manual
31
UNIT CONFIGURATION
For the subsequent enabling of the disabled digital signals, there are three options:
Manual reset manual of the unit.
Automatic enabling: if a digital input previously disabled changes its state less than QFLICKER times in a time of TFLICKER
seconds, this input is enabled. If the QFLICKER paramater has a value 0, the automatic enabling of the digital outputsl is
not carried out.
Enabling by operators command :Default order or programmed by the user (generic order that can be sent from the console or
telecommnad) through which the unit is indicated to enable all the digital inputs that were disabled. The order only
provoques the enabling of the disabled digital inputs without having influence in the blinking treatment, that is, if, after
the order, input blinking is detected, they get disabled again.
3.3 PROGRAMMING OF DIGITAL OUTPUTS

By console it is carried out in the screen Digital outputs configuration.
By keyboard/display: PROG. TABLE 0 - PROG.CONFIG PROG. OUTPUTS
OUTPUT ACTIV. T.
The functionality of each digital output can be programmed like an OR of the logical signals available in this unit (see point List
of available signals, in the appendixes.)
In the programming through Console (recommended), for each digital output it is clicked with the mouse in the cells
corresponding to the signs whose OR wants to be activated by the output. (Matrix programming).
In the programming screen, at he end of the available signal list, there is a row with the title OTPUT TYPE, in which each
output is defined as Trip, T1, T2 , T3, Close, C1, C2 , C3, Memorized or Nothing. The operation
depending on the output type:
If it is of the type trip the output carries out the sealing logic( if the sealing setting is set to yes) and that of opening failure
of 2 or 3 breakers (depending on the model).
If it is of the type T1, T2, T3 the output carries out the sealing logic (if the sealing setting is set to yes) and that of the
open failure of the specified breaker.
If it is of the type Close the output carries out the sealing logic( if the sealing setting is set to yes) and that of opening
failure of 2 or 3 breakers (depending on the model).
If it is of the type C1, C2 o C3 the output carries out the sealing logic (if the sealing setting is set to yes) and that of the
open failure of the specified breaker.
If it is Memorized, once it has been activated, it can only be deactivated by a digital input programmed as output.
If it is set to nothing it does nothing special
The output activation time defines the minimum operation time of each physical output, once it has been activated (in seconds).
The range is from 0.05 to5 seconds. It appears in the last row of the screen.
Through keyboard it is more difficult. In PROG OUTPUTS, we can find ASSIGN SIGNALS for each of them with the following
possibilities:
NO SIGNAL (the output remains without assigning, but it can be activated by control commands)
SAME SIGNALS (it is not wished to change the current programming)
OTHER SIGNALS (it is wished to change the current programming). When pushing (Intro), it is gone through the logical
signals with the arrow ; when we arrive to a signal that we want to use in the OR that defines the output, we press R; when we
finish with the signals, we pulse , which takes us to the programming of the output type, with the possibilities already
indicated.

PD300 User Manual
32
UNIT CONFIGURATION
3.4 PROGRAMMING OF LEDS

Through Console, it is carried out in the screen LEDs programming
By keyboard/display: PROG. TABLE 0 - PROG.CONFIG PROG. LEDs
OUTPUT ACTIV. T.
The proceedings are totally analogous to the programming of digital outputs, except that the activation time is not programmed
and that the possible types are Memorized and Non memorized. The non-memorized turns off when the cause for turning on
disappears; to turn off the memorized a Fault acknowledgement must be done either by keyboard/display or digital input.
3.5 PROGRAMMING OF LOGIC OUTPUTS

The user can configure up to 15 logic outputs, called logic 1 to logic 15 and they can be assigned to output relays, LEDs,
locked inputs, signals to be registered in the oscillograph data recorder , etc
The logic output programming can be only carried out through the protection Console, (and not through keyboard/display) from he
available basic signals which are detailed in the Appendix Available signals (as many of them corresponds to optional
functions, all the models do not have all these functions) The programming procedure is described in another document:
Protection Console Manual
Logic signals are generated in accordance with the following layout:
As it can be seen, defining a logic output involves the following:

up to 16 of the available signals (or their negations), forming an OR function
up to 16 of the available signals (or their negations), forming an AND function
An OR or AND function is programmable from the results of the two foregoing functions.
A programmable delay for the activation of the output.
A programmable duration for the activation of the output
The delay is the time elapsed from the moment there is 1 logic at the output of the logic ports and the moment when the relevant
logic output activates. If 1 disappears during that time, the signal does not activate. It can be programmed from 0 to 599.9
sec., in 0.1 sec. steps.
The pulse time (duration) is the time for which the logic signal remains active. It can be programmed in two ways:
"By logic": after the delay, the output remains active as long as there is a 1 at the output of the programmed logic.
"By time": the time is programmed for which the output must remain active, and after that time it de-activates regardless of
the status of the programmed logic output. Only another move there from 0 to 1 will re-activate the output, once the delay
has elapsed.
This time can range from 0.1 to 599.9 seconds, with 0.1 sec. steps.
A logic output i can be used as available signal for another logic signal programming input j or for itself.

PD300 User Manual
33
UNIT CONFIGURATION
Simple example of application: Digital output DO7 is to be made to follow digital input DI6 with a 1 second delay.
Delay time = 1 sec.

Duration = "by logic"
SD7 digital output programming: logic 1
3.6 PROGRAMMING GENERAL SETTINGS

Relay on duty: it has to be set on YES for the protection to be completely operational. If it's set on NO the protection responds to
communications and the keyboard/display so that it can enter into operation; it also activates the relay and/or LED which has
been programmed as "Out of duty relay", deactivating all the rest.
Breaker number: this is an identification text. It may be programmed alphanumerically through communications, but only
numerically through the keyboard.
Setting
Minimum Maximum Step Notes
Relay in service
YES/NO
Breaker number
5 alfanum. Characters
3.7 DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION GENERAL SETTING PROGRAMMING

It has 6 setting tables:
Winding Transformation Ratio: it shows, in an independent way, the relations between each winding phase current:
transformer ratio. It is used in the differential and restricted earth protection.
Earthed transformation ratios: Only in 2 winding models and genrator: It shows in an independent way, the relations between
each earthed current transformers ratio. It is used in restricted earth.
Current transformation ratio: Only in 2 winding models: It is used only to give measurements regarding the primary.
Winding nominal voltage: (kV): it shows, in an independent way, each winding nominal voltage in k. It is used in the
differential protection.
Type of connection: It shows each winding type connection: star, delta or zigzag. In 3 winding models only star or delta
connection is allowed
Time code: It indicates each winding dephase regarding the primary winding
Application maximum: It shows in MVA the application power. It is used for the differential measurement calculation. If it is
set to 0, the valued indicated in the taps is used.
Winding tap: It is used for the differential measurement calculation, as long as the application maximum power is set to 0.

PD300 User Manual
34
UNIT CONFIGURATION
2/3 windings: In the 3 winding models it shows if the differential uses 2 or 3 windings
Nominal voltage in winding 1(kV)
T i ratio in winding 1
Type of connection in winding 1
Time code 1-2
Time code 1-3
Enable function 86
IG 1 trafo ratio
IG 2 trafo ratio
Voltage trafo ratio
Application maximum current (MVA)
Winding tap 1
Winding tap 2
Winding tap 3
2/3 winding differential
1
1
1
1
1
1
1000
1000
1000
10000
10000
10000
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
Y/D
Y/D
Y/D
0
0
11
11
1
1
1
1
1
1
0.2
0.5
0.1
0.5
0.1
0.5
0.1
10000
10000
10000
1000
5000
100
20
100
20
100
20
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
2wind/3wind
YES/NO
In = 5A
In = 1A
In = 5A
In = 1A
In = 5A
In = 1A
Note: In case of obtaining the winding tap by calculation (see appendix), the obtained result must be between the indicated limits for the tap, according the In
calibre (0.5 to 100A for In=5A and 0.1 to 20 for In=1A); in case the result is higher than the maximum it will be fixed in the maximum, but if it is lower than the
minimum, it will be fixed in the minimum.
3.8 COMMUNICATION CONFIGURATION

3.8.1 Front door Communication (Port 1_1) and rear port no. 2 (Port 1_2)
PD300 unit has its own address identifying number, which makes possible identify the messages sent to the unit from
the PC through its front port ( or rear port) with protocol PROCOME. This address is programmable from the
keyboard/display entering CHANGE SETTINS, "PROG. TABLE 0", "COMUNICAT.", FRONT PORT, UCL ADDRESS".
The units leave the factory with the address 4. This number is the one used in de Engineering program when defining the
installation.
If for any reason this number is changed in Engineering, the address programming has to be changed and vice versa.
If a PD300 unit is replaced by another one, the installed unit must have the same address as the removed one.
The baud rate, parity and the number of STOP bits can also be programmed in the "COMUNICAT ". The units leave the
factory at 19200 baud, even parity and 1 bit of Stop.
The established communication setting can be viewed on display, by entering SETTINGS (see), SEE TABLE 0,
COMMUNICAT, PORT COM1..
3.8.2 Communication via rear port n 1 (Port 2)

The protocol type to be used by this port is defined in SETTINGS (change), PROG. TABLE 0, COMMUNIC.,
SELEC. COMMUN.COM2. The options are: Procome, DNP, MODBUS, IEC870-5-101 (not valid for RS485) or IEC8705-103.
In DNP, MODBUS, IEC870-5-101 protocols, a digital signal Control RTS is available, which is activated during the data
transmission from the protection.

PD300 User Manual
35
UNIT CONFIGURATION
Procome
If the option chosen is Procome, in SETTINGS (change), PROG. TABLE 0, COMMUNIC. PORT COM2, a settings
group is programmed (it is not necessary that they have the same values) which is analogous to the one defining the front
port, but, besides, there is another setting CONTROL SIGNALS, with the options None and RTS; this setting also
affects the port COM1.
DNP
If the option chosen is DNP, the address is programmable from the keyboard/display, entering SETTINGS (change),
PROG. TABLE 0, COMMUNIC PORT COM2, CONFIG.DNP, LCU ADDRESS. This address does not need to be
the same as the one of the front port, but it is convenient to avoid confusions. The units leave the factory with the address
and the rest of DNP parameters without being programmed. They have to be programmed by the user.
If a replacement of the PD300 unit by other is made, the installed unit must have the same address as the one removed.
The unit also has an identification number of the Master unit it is connected to, and which only accepts messages coming
from there. It is also programmable in the unit within the CONFIG. DNP. The units leave the factory with the address 0.
They are also programmable the baud rate, the parity and the number of STOP bits. The units leave the factory at 9600
baud, without parity, 1 Stop bit.
The established communication settings can be seen on the display, entering SETTINGS (see), SEE TABLE 0,
COMMUNICATIONS, PORT COM2, CONFIG. DNP
The settings can be displayed/programmed both via keyboard/display and via PC with the Protection Console.
For more detail on communication DNP, see the corresponding Appendix.
MODBUS
If the chosen option is MODBUS, the address is programmable from the keyboard/display, entering SETTINGS (change),
PROG. TABLE 0, COMMUNICATIONS PORT COM2, CONFIG.MODBUS, LCU ADDRESS. This address does not
need to be the same as the one of the front port, but it is convenient to avoid confusions. The units leave the factory with
the address and the rest of the MODBUS parameters without been programmed. They have to be programmed by the user.
If the PD300 unit is replaced by other, the installed unit must have the same address as the one removed.
They are also programmable the baud rate, the parity and the auxiliary timers for activation and deactivation of the RT
signal (internal).
The established communication settings can be seen on display, entering SETTINGS (see), SEE TABLE 0,
COMMUNICATIONS, PORT COM2, CONFIG. MODBUS
For more detail on communication MODBUS, see the corresponding Appendix.
IEC 870-5-101
If the chosen option is 101, the address is programmable from the keyboard/display, entering SETTINGS (change),
PROG. TABLE 0, COMMUNICATIONS PORT COM2, "GENERALS", "LINK ADDRESS" and APPLIC ADDRESS.
This address does not need to be the same as the one of the front port, but it is convenient to avoid confusions. The units
leave the factory with the address and the rest of the 101 parameters without been programmed. They have to be
programmed by the user.
If the PD300 unit is replaced by other, the installed unit must have the same address as the one removed.
signal (internal).
The established communication settings can be seen on display, entering SETTINGS (see), SEE TABLE 0,
COMMUNICATIONS, PORT COM2, "GENERALS"
This protocol is not valid for RS485 ports. For more details on 101 communications, see the corresponding setting.
IEC 870-5-103

PD300 User Manual
36
UNIT CONFIGURATION
If the chosen option is 103, the address is programmable from the keyboard/display, entering SETTINGS (change),
PROG. TABLE 0, CONFIG. COMMUNICAT., PORT COM2, LCU ADDRESS. This address does not need to be the
same as the one of the front port, but it is convenient to avoid confusions. The units leave the factory with the address
and the rest of the 103 parameters without been programmed. They have to be programmed by the user.
If the PL300 unit is replaced by another one, the installed unit must have the same address as the one removed.
signal (internal).
The established communication settings can be seen on display, entering SETTINGS (see), SEE TABLE 0, CONFIG.
COMMUNICAT., PORT COM2.
Apart from the keyboard/display, the settings can also be displayed/programmed from the PC.
For more detail on 103 communication, see the corresponding Appendix.
3.8.3 Ethernet Communication

It is only applied in models with Ethernet port.
In order to configure the Ethernet port the fist parameter to be configured corresponds to the TCP/IP communication
selection. It is programmed from the keyboard/display, by entering "SETTINGS (change)", "PROG. TABLE 0",
"COMMUNICATIONS", SELECT COM TCPIP. The options of this parameter are: Procome and No. The operation
according to this parameter is as follows:
Procome: Through Ethernet port communication with Procome protocol is possible. In this case the selection of
Procome protocol in the other rear port (com 2) is not allowed. In short, through Ethernet port the
communication is with Procome protocol, whilst in the second rear port (if available) communication is carried out
through the selected protocol, except Procome.
NO. communication is not carried out through Ethernet port. In this case, the second rear port (if available)
communicates through the selected protocol, Procome is allowed.
The remaining configuration parameters of Ethernet port are configured with the Sipcon console, in the menu
Configuration TCP/IP). These parameters are those below:
Generals
Protection IP address. It shows the protection IP address (server unit). They are 32 bits, in decimal notation separated
by dots.
Subnet mask. It defines which part of the IP address identified by the network. They are 32 bits, in decimal notation
separated by dots. All those IP addresses that do not fulfil the net mask, that is, those which do not have the part
of the net mask at 1 are not considered to belong to the net and they are not treated. For example, the mask
255.255.255.000 allows 256 server addresses that would share the first three values of the address.
Gateway. Link gate. It shows the IP address the messages will be sent to for those servers tat do not belong to the local
net. It will be the IP address of the unit in charge of carrying out the router functions of the net.
No. of connections. It is fixed at 1.
Procome
Master IP address. It shows the protection IP address (client unit).
Port. It shows the port to which the master unit is connected.
UCL Address. It is the protection address, to which the protocol responds.

PD300 User Manual
37
UNIT CONFIGURATION
3.9 OTHER CONFIGURATION SETTINGS

Only accessible by keyboard/display, on SETTINGS (change), PROG. TABLE 0, DEFINE PROTECT.. They are the following:
3.9.1 Frequency
It can be 50 Hz or 60 Hz. It is the fundamental basic protection setting. If it is not the correct one, the measurements
and, therefore, the protection operation will be wrong.
3.9.2 Language
It can be English or Spanish. It relates to the texts shown on display.
3.9.3 Phase order

It can be A, B, C or C, B, A. It affects only to the protection functions of broken conductor and unbalance (currents and
voltages). To verify that the order corresponds to the wiring, check in Measurements that the ratio of the inverse/direct
component is close to 0%, when introducing 3 balanced currents of about 1 A.
3.9.4 Pushbuttons enabling and lockings by commands

Under the name PUSHBUTTONS there are two settings:
ENAB. PUSHBUT (Pushbuttons enabling ): If this setting is at FUNCTIONALS, they keys can be used to give
commands; if they are at NO, they cannot.
ENAB. LOCK. COMMAND (Enabling of locking/unlocking by commands): If this setting is at YES, the protection
function locking/unlocking control commands that have been programmed are enabled; if they are at NO, they are
disabled.
3.9.5 Power supply supervision enabling

The power supply supervision can be or cannot be enabled. See section Power supply supervision for its operation.
3.9.6 External power supply supervision

Only available in those model with the option Battery voltage measurement. The three settings for this function, enable,
minimum threshold (V) and maximum threshold(V), are in this menu. See section External power supply supervision for
its operation.
3.9.7 Temperature supervision

The three settings for this function, enable, minimum threshold () and maximum threshold(), are in this menu. See
section temperature supervision for its operation.
3.9.8 Calibration
This menu position is exclusively to be used by the Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution SA technicians, according to a
certain procedure. It should not be used by the user.

PD300 User Manual
38
UNIT CONFIGURATION
3.9.9 Display contrast setting

The procedure that should be followed is the following:
By the pressing key (of a 16 key keyboard) for 3 to 5 seconds, you enter in the contrast setting menu, appearing
the text: -DOWN +UP.
With the keys and the contrast is adjusted. With more brightness is given and with it gets dark.
To validate, press ESC or after a minute it goes back to the usual position, with the carried-out changes.

PD300 User Manual
39
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS. DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS
4. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS. DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS

4.1 PROTECTION FUNCTION LOCKING
Each of the protection functions can be locked by a digital input or by a logic function (combination of inputs and/or control
signals). See Programming logic signals in the Configuration section
The locking programming is carried out through console and keyboard/display as any other setting inside the corresponding
function.
4.2 DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION

The differential protection will be in percent terms with harmonic restraint and instantaneous. The protection function is the
same for 2 and 3 winding, and the difference lays in the calculation of the differential current (see the corresponding appendix).
The settings corresponding to the differential currents (shown as xIn) are indicated in tap steps.
The differential protection generic curve is the following one:
Depending on the step and gradient current settings, different characteristics can be obtained, for example:

PD300 User Manual
40
4.2.1 Percent characteristic

It matches the graphic section with the possibility of restraint. It can be double gradient or single gradient
The protection operation takes place when once the programmed time has elapsed, since the differential current is inside
the trip area with restraint possibility (see graph) and besides, the 2nd and 5th harmonic constituents do not cause
restraint.
The settings (6 tables) are:
Setting
Enable
Sensitivity (xTap)
I step 1 (xTap)
I step 2 (xTap)
1 (%)
2 (%)
Additional time (s)
Minimum
Maximum
Step
0.15
0
0
5
5
0
2
2
20
100
200
60
0.01
0.01
0.01
1
1
0.01
Note: The sensitivity value must fulfil the following:
Notes
YES/NO
See note
Tapmin imum Sensitivity 0.05In
being In the rated current (5A or 1A). If not, the sensitivity value is automatically modified to fulfil it.
The sensitivity and step currents are shown in tap steps.
The settings are in the Console, in the Differential Protection screen.
4.2.2 Harmonic restraint

4.2.2.1 Inrush restraint
The protection differentiates the inrush currents by means of the differential currents 2nd harmonic component
or 2nd + 4th of the differential current according the setting selection.
When the component of the 2nd or the 2nd + 4th harmonic of the differential current in one or more phases
exceed the set percent of the fundamental, the trip will be inhibited in that phase or in all of them, depending
on the selection.
In order to the harmonic restrain act, the differential current of the fundamental must exceed the set minimum
value set, so if it below that threshold, the harmonic restrain does not act.
Setting
No
2nd PHASE
Magnitude
Idif_2
Idif_2
2nd GLOBAL
Idif_2
2nd + 4th PHASE

nd
th
2 + 4 GLOBAL
Operation
It does not inhibit in any phase
It inhibits only in the phases exceeding the harmonic setting.
It inhibits in the three phases when any of them exceeds the
harmonic setting.
( Idif _ 2) 2 + ( Idif _ 4) 2
It inhibits only in the phases exceeding the harmonic setting.
( Idif _ 2) + ( Idif _ 4)
It inhibits in the three phases when any of them exceeds the

harmonic setting..
Being:
Idif_2: Idifferential 2nd harmonic
Idif_4: Idifferential 2nd harmonic

PD300 User Manual
41

The settings (6 tables) are the following:
Setting
Min
Max Step Notes

NO / 2nd PHASE / 2nd GLOBAL / 2nd +4th PHASE /
Enable 2nd harmonic restrain
2nd +4th GLOBAL
2nd harmonic restrain threshold (%) 5
100 1
Differential threshold (xTap)
0.15 1
0.01 See note
Note: The differential threshold must fulfil the following:
Tapmin imum Treshold 0.05In

being In the rated current (5A or 1A). If not, the threshold value is automatically modified in order to fulfil it.
The setting are in the Console in the Differential Protection screen.
4.2.2.2 Overexcitation
The transformer overexcitation current is discriminated by means of the 5th harmonic.
When the 5th harmonic component of the differential current in one or more phases exceeds the basic set
percent the trip will be inhibited, according to its enabling:
NO: It does not inhibit in any phase
GLOBAL: It inhibits in the three phases
PHASE: It inhibits only in the phases that exceed the harmonic setting.
For the harmonic restraint to take place, the differential current of the first harmonic must be over the setting
minimum value, so if it is below that threshold the harmonic restraint does not act.
The settings (6 tables) are the following:
Setting
Min. Max. Step Notes
5th harmonic restrain enable
NO/GLOBAL/PHASE
5 th harmonic restraint threshold(%) 5
100 1
Differential threshold (Xtap)
0,15 1
0,01 See note
Note: The differential threshold must fulfil that:
Tapmin imum Treshold 0.05In

being In the rated current (5A or 1A). If not, the threshold value is automatically modified in order to fulfil it.
The settings are in the Console, on the Differential Protection screen
4.2.3 Instantaneous differential

The relay trips once the programmed time since the differential current exceeds the programmed setting has passed. It
does not have harmonic restraint.
The setting (6 tables) are:
Settings
Enable
Trip (xTap)
Additional time(s)
Minimum
Maximum
Step
1.0
0
20
60
0.01
0.01
Notes
YES/NO
The settings are in the Console, on the Differential Protection screen.

PD300 User Manual
42
4.2.4 Function 86
It activates the relays programmed with this function when a trip by differential (instantaneous or percentual) occurs, for
being used as locking of the close circuits of the breakers. The only setting for this function is the enabling (YES,
enabled, NO, disabled).
The relays are deactivated by the actuation of the Close unblocking input, by pushing the R key or by command from
the console.
4.3 RESTRICTED EARTH PROTECTION

It is only available in 2 winding models and generator.
It has 2 independent units, which use IG1 and IG2 transformers. For each of them the winding can be programmable regarding
the one it is compared to or if it is an autotransformer
The settings are in the Console, in the Differential Protection screen:
Setting
Enable

YES/NO
0.25
20
0.01 In = 5 A
Trip (A)
0.05
4
0.01 In = 1 A and Generator
Additional time (s)
0
60
0.01
Comparation winding
Wind 1, Wind 2 or Autotrafo
In the case of genertaor, as trips can occur due to the saturation of the Tis, it is convenient to time the function with a time
higher than the one of the external fault clearing.
4.3.1 Winding 1/ Winding 2

The comparation winding setting must be Winding1 or Winding 2.
This function is applicable when a winding is an earthed star and has a measurement current transformer in the earthwired. This function compares the winding current and the earth-wired trafo. The magnitude and the direction are
analysed.
Magnitude: If the difference between the residual and neutral current (algebraic sum), once applied their
corresponding transforming ratio, must exceed the programmed threshold.
RTI
3 I 0 I G Setting
RTN
Directional: It must show that the fault is internal. The residual current and the neutral current must be opposed.
If the residual current is below 80mA (In 5A models) or 16mA (In 1A models), the directional is not taken into
account.
If the neutral current is below 80mA (In 5A models) or 16mA (In 1A models), the trip is not allowed.
Signalling: restricted earth trip signals are given if the directional shows internal fault and the difference between both
magnitudes is bigger than the threshold.
4.3.2 Autotransformer
The comparation winding setting must be "Autotransformer
This function is used to protect an autotransformer. The magnitude and the direction are analysed.
Magnitude: If the difference between the residual current of the two windings ( I01 and I02) and the neutral current
(algebraic sum), once applied their corresponding transforming ratio, must exceed the programmed threshold.

PD300 User Manual
43
RTI1
RTI 2
3 I 01 +
3 I 02 I G Setting
RTN
RTN
Directional: It must show that the fault is internal. The 2 winding residual current and the neutral current must be
opposed.
If the residual current is below 80mA (In 5A models) or 16mA (In 1A models), the directional is not taken into
account.
If the neutral current is below 80mA (In 5A models) or 16mA (In 1A models), the trip is not allowed.
Signalling: restricted earth trip signals are given if the directional shows internal fault and the difference between both
magnitudes is bigger than the threshold.
4.4 PHASE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

4.4.1 General description
It has independent units for each of the windings. Three-phase overcurrent protection, with the following selectable
characteristics (functions 50/51):
Time unit characteristic

Normal inverse time(I BSC or I ANSI)
Inverse short time (IC BSC)
Inverse long time (IL BSC)
Very inverse time (MI BSC or MI ANSI)
Extremely inverse time (EI BSC or EI ANSI)
Special very inverse time (MIEs BSC)
Moderately inverse time(ANSI)
Users curve (USER 1 o USER 2)
Definite time
Instantaneous characteristic
2 instantaneous elements
Additional time
The settings are in the Console in the following screens:
Winding 1 overcurrent protection
Winding 3 overcurrent protection (only in 3 winding models)
4.4.2 Range of settings for timed characteristics (6 tables)

Setting
Enable phase time unit
YES/NO
0.1 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Pickup of time unit (A)
0.02 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
Definite time
Type of time response
Normal inverse curve, very inverse curve, extremely inverse curve,etc..
Users curve
Time index
0.05 1.09 0.01 IEC curves
0.5 30.0 0.1 ANSI curves

PD300 User Manual
44

Definite time (s)
0.0
600.0 0.01
The pickup current is set in secondary Amperes.

Working in definite time, the relay trips as the set time expires once the starting current has been exceeded,
independently from the current value.
Working with curve, the time to trip depends on the selected curve (family and index) and the current value. The curves,
which are normal, very inverse and extremely inverse, or user curves can be selected as corresponding to the standard
BS142 (IEC 255-4) or ANSI. In the curve appendix, graphics and formulas for calculating the time are given, as a
function of the ratio between the current and the pickup current. If the ratio exceeds than 40, 40 will be taken for
calculating.
The maximum error in times, for values that exceeds 50 ms, is 40 ms or 5% of the theoretical value (the higher of the
two). For the definite time setting of 0 ms, the behavior is the same as for the instantaneous characteristic (see next
section).
Note. If an unacceptable index value is programmed for a type of curve, the unit takes the closest acceptable value.
4.4.3 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (low level) (6

tables)
Setting
Enable
Min
Max
Step Notes
YES/NO
0.1 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Phase instantaneous trip (A)
0.02 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
Additional time (s)
0.00 60.00 0.01
The trip current is set in secondary Amperes.

If additional time 0 is programmed, for current values between the tripping current and 1.5 times that value, it trips
between 40 and 50 ms; for 2 times the tripping current between 35 and 40 ms, and from 3 times the tripping currents,
on 30 to 35 ms. If an additional time is programmed, this is added to the indicated time.
With additional time that exceeds 50 ms the maximum time error is 30 ms or 5% of the theoretical value (the highest of
the two).
4.4.4 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (high level) (6

tables)
Setting
Enable
Min
Max
Step Notes
YES/NO
0.1 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Phase instantaneous trip (A)
0.02 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
Additional time (s)
0.00 60.00 0.01
The characteristics of the times are the same as in the previous section.
4.5 RESIDUAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

It has independent units for each of the windings.
The protection works in the same way as the phase overcurrent protection, taking as input measurement 3 times the
homopole sequence current module.

PD300 User Manual
45
3 I 0 = Ia + Ib + Ic
4.5.2 Settings ranges of the timed characteristic (6 tables)

Setting
Enable residual timing
Min. Max.
Step Notes
YES/NO
0.2 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Residual timed pickup (A)
0.05 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
Definite time
Timed response type
Normal, very extrem. Inverse curve, etc
Users curve
0.05 1.09 0.01 For IEC curves
Time index
0.5 30.0 0.1 For ANSI curves
Definite time (s)
0,1 600.0 0.01
The remarks about curves are the same as the ones quoted for phases.

tables)
Setting
Enable
Min
Max
Step Notes
YES/NO
0.2 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Residual instantaneous pickup (A)
0.05 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
Instantaneous additional time (s) 0.10 60.00 0.01
The remarks about additional time are the same as the ones quoted for phases.
4.5.4 Setting ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (high level) (6

tables)
Setting
Enable
Min
Max
Step Notes
YES/NO
0.2 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Residual instantaneous pickup (A)
0.05 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
The remarks about additional time are the same as the ones quoted for phases
4.6 CURRENT UNBALANCE PROTECTION

It has independent units for each of the windings.
It contains the protection functions for instantaneous and time unit unbalances.

PD300 User Manual
46

This protection works in identical fashion to the phase overcurrent protection using 3 times the inverse sequence current
module as the input measure.
3 I 2 = Ia + a 2 Ib + a Ic
Where a =1|120
It must be taken in account that the order of phase A-B-C or C-B-A is programmable, so I2 depend on this setting.
4.6.2 Setting ranges for time unit characteristics (6 tables)

Setting
Enable unbalance time unit.
Min
Max
Step Notes
YES/NO
0.2 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Unbalance time. unit pickup (A)
0.05 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
Definite time
Timed response type
Users curve
0,05 1,09 0,01 For IEC curves
Time index
0,5 30,0 0,1 For ANSI curves
Definite time (s)
0,1 600,0 0,01
The remarks made regarding the curves are the same as those given for the phases.
4.6.3 Setting range for instantaneous characteristics (6 tables)

Setting
Min
Enable instantaneous unbalance unit.
0.2
Instantaneous unbalance pickup (A)
0.05
Instantaneous additional time (s)
0.10
Max
Step Notes
YES/NO
160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
60.00 0.01
The remarks made regarding the additional time are the same as those given for the phases.
4.7 NEUTRAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

It is only available in 2 winding models (50G/51G function).
It has two independent units that use the logical input measurements 4 (unit 1) and 5 (unit 2). It works with the same
characteristic possibilities as those described for phases and independent settings for both units.
The settings are in the Console, on the screen Earthed protection.
4.7.2 Range of settings for timed characteristic (6 tables)

Setting
Enable neutral time unit
Min
Max
Step Notes
YES/NO
0.1 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Pickup neutral time unit (A)
0.02 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
Timed response type
Definite time

PD300 User Manual
47
Time index
Definite time (s)

Users curve
0.05 1.09 0.01 For IEC curves
0.0 600.0 0.01
The remarks about curves and accuracy are the same as the ones quoted for phases.

tables)
Setting
Enable neutral instantaneous
Min
Max
Step Notes
YES/NO
0.1 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Neutral instantaneous pickup (A)
0.02 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
Additional instantaneous time (s) 0.00 60.00 0.01
The trip current is set in Amperes in the secondary.

The remarks regarding the operation time are the same as those given for the phases.
4.7.4 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (high level) (6

tables)
Setting
Enable neutral instantaneous
Min
Max
Step Notes
YES/NO
0.1 160.0 0.01 In = 5 A
Neutral instantaneous pickup (A)
0.02 32.0 0.01 In = 1 A
Additional instantaneous time (s) 0.00 60.00 0.01
The time characteristics are the same as those given for the phases.
4.8 OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

3-unit overvoltage protection, that may be simple or compound (See General settings), with the following selectable
characteristics (function 59):
Time delay:
Reverse normal time ( I BSC or I ANSI)
Reverse short time (IC BSC)
Reverse long time (IL BSC)
Moderately inverse time (ANSI)
2 users curve (USUAR 1 to USUAR 2)
Definite time
Instantaneous characteristics:

PD300 User Manual
48

Instantaneous element.
Additional time.
This protection operation does not cause automatic reclosing.
4.8.2 Settings ranges of the time characteristic (6 tables)

Setting Min. Max. Step Notes
Phase time enable
Phase time pick up (V)
10
YES/NO
200
0.1
definite time
inverse normal curve
very inverse
"
extrem. inverse
"
Users
"
Time response time
Time index
Definite time (s)
0.05
0.5
0.0
1.09
30.0
600.0
0.01
0.1
0.01
For IEC curves

For ANSIcurves
These settings are located in the Console in the Voltage protection screen.
The time response curves are the same as those used by the overprotection protections.
The pick up voltage is set in Volt in the secondary.
Working in definite time, the relay trips as the set time expires once the starting voltage has been exceeded,
independently from the voltage value.
Working with curve, the time to trip depends on the selected curve (family and index) and the voltage value. In Appendix
II, the graphics and the formulae are given for the time calculation, depeding on the quotient between the voltage and the
start voltage.
The remarks about the accuracy in the times are the same as those given for the overcurrent function.
4.8.3 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (6 tables) .

Setting
Phase instantaneous enable
YES/NO
Phase instantaneous trip (V)
10
200
0.1
These settings are located in the Console in the Voltage protrection screen.
The trip voltage is set in Volts in the secondary.
The remarks regarding the time are the same as those given for the overcurrent function
Note.- Both in the time and instantaneous function, once the protection is started, the drop occurs when the voltage get down to the 99% of the value
programmed as pick up, if it is higher than 50 V (or to the 98% if its is lower).
4.9 UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

3-unit undervoltage protection, that may be simple or compound (See General settings, with the following selectable
characteristics (function 59):
Time delay:
Reverse normal time ( I BSC or I ANSI)

PD300 User Manual
49

Reverse short time (IC BSC)
Reverse long time (IL BSC)
Moderately inverse time (ANSI)
2 users curve (USUAR 1 to USUAR 2)
Definite time
Instantaneous characteristics:
Instantaneous element.
Additional time.
This protection operation does not cause automatic reclosing.
4.9.2 Settings ranges of the time characteristic (6 tables)

Setting
Min. Max.
Habilitacin temporizado fases
Phase time pick up (V)
10
200
Time response type
Time index
Definite time (s)
Step Notes
SI/NO
0,1
definite time
inverse normal curve
very inverse
"
extrem. inverse
"
Users
0,05 1.09 0.01 For IEC curves
0.0 600.0 0.01
The time response curves are the same as those used by the overprotection protections.
The pick up voltage is set in Volt in the secondary.
Working in definite time, the relay trips as the set time expires after it drops below the stat voltage, independently from
the voltage value.
Working with curve, the time to trip depends on the selected curve (family and index) and the voltage value. In Appendix
II, the graphics and the formulae are given for the time calculation, depeding on the quotient between the voltage and the
start voltage.
The remarks about the accuracy in the times are the same as those given for the overcurrent function.
4.9.3 Settings ranges of the instantaneous characteristic (6 tables)

Setting
Phase instantaneous enabling
YES/NO
Phase instantaneous trip (V)
10
200
0.1
The trip voltage is set in Volts in the secondary.
Note.- Both in the time and instantaneous function, once the protection is started, the drop occurs when the voltage is increased to the 101% of the value
programmed as pick up, if it is higher than 50 V (or to the 102% if its is lower).

PD300 User Manual
50
4.10 OVEREXCITATION PROTECTION

4.10.1 5th harmonic
The 5th harmonic current percent is measured regarding the 1st harmonic in the primary winding. The trip occurs when
the 5th harmonic value in any phase exceeds the setting during the programmed time
The settings (4 tables) used are the following:
Setting
Enable
Operation minimum current
Pick-up threshold (V/Hz)
Definite time (sec)
Minimum
Maximum
Step
0.50
0.1
5
0
10
2
100
600
0.01
0.01
1
0.01
Notes
YES/NO
In = 5 A
In = 1 A
The settings are in the Console, on the Additional Protection screen.
4.10.2 V/f
These units are only available in 2 winding models
It has two independent units
The ratio between the voltage measurement and the frequency is measured. The trip occurs when this value is higher than
the setting during the programmed time. It can operate with definite time or with time curve.
The accuracy of this unit is better than the 5% in the range of 3Hz.
The setting used for each units are the following:
Setting
Enable
Operation minimum voltage
Pick up threshold (V/Hz)
Minimum
50
1.00
Maximum
0.05
0.5
0
Fixed time (sec)
Notes
150 1
4.00 0.01
Timed response type

Time index
Step
YES/NO
1.09 0.01
30.0 0.1
600 0.01
Definite time
Normal, very, extrem. Inverse curve, etc
Users curve
For IEC curves
For ANSI curves
The settings are in the Console, on the Additional Protection screen.

The notes on curves are the same as the ones given for the phase timing.
4.11 FREQUENCY PROTECTION

This function consists of 5 steps, which can be programmed as maximum or minimum frequency.
The independent settings for each of the steps are the following ones:
Parameters
Min. Max.
Step Notes
Enable
YES/NO (for each step)
Pick- up (Hz)
45 65
0.01 (For each step)
Definite time(s) 0
600.00 0.01 (For each step)
Type
Maximum/Minimum

PD300 User Manual
51

The common settings for all the steps are the following:
Parameters
Supervision minimum voltage (V) 40 200 1
(For all the steps)
Number of pick-up cycles
3
15
1
(for all the steps)
The response time of this unit will be that corresponding to the number of pick up cycles programmed in the setting plus 35 ms.
The settings are in the Console, on the Frequency Protection screen.
4.11.1 Minimum frequency

In each step, the pick up occurs if the frequency is lower than the value set during a number of cycles that is the same or
exceeds the Number of pick-up cycles setting. Once it is picked-up, the programmed time must be exceeded in order to
trip. The unit drops out if the frequency is correct during 2 cycles.
Locks
If the current measurement is lower than the Supervision minimum voltage setting the frequency unit pick up is not
allowed.
4.11.2 Maximum frequency

This function occurs if the frequency exceeds the value set during a number of cycles that is the same or exceeds than the
Number of pick-up cycles setting. Once it is picked-up, the programmed time must be exceeded in order to trip. The
unit drops out if the frequency is correct during 2 cycles.
Locks
If the current measurement is lower than the Supervision minimum voltage setting the frequency unit pick up is not
allowed.
4.12 THERMAL IMAGE

It has two independent units for each of the windings.
This function calculates the temperature according to the current and recent protected unit conditions. This temperature is
displayed as a % of the trip value. If the function is enabled when the programmed value is reached a warning signal is activated
and when it reaches 100% the thermal image trip signal is activated. Once it has tripped due to this cause, the relay does not
drop out meanwhile the calculated temperature remains above 75% or the calculated temperature remains over the alarm
threshold. The calculated temperature can be reseted by means of keyboard/display (entering by "" to .TEMPERATUR Acknow.
and pushing for two seconds) or by console command.
The time taken to reach trip status is given by the curves attached. These provided the time according to the ratio between the
current and the programmed nominal current according to the programmed heating constant. They match the following formula
(starting from temperature 0):
Being:
t: trip time
1: heating constant

PD300 User Manual
52

I: average current
I0: programmed nominal current
Once it has tripped, there is another time invariant that can be programmed for the cooling.
In the following table the trip times are shown
The settings used by this unit are the following ones:

Setting
Enable
Heating time constant (min)
Cooling time constant (min)
Alarm threshold (%)
Nominal current (A)

YES/NO
3
60
1
3
60
1
80
100 1
0.2 10
0.01 In = 5 A
0.04 2
0.01 In = 1 A

PD300 User Manual
53
4.12.1 Heating curves

The heating curve is calculated from the following formula:
Being:
Tf = final temperature
Ti= initial temperature
t = time
= heating time constant
For Ti = 0 the formula will be
As
It results as a heating curve
The following figure gives, as an example, the heating curves, with 3 min time constant for I/I0 = 1 and for I/I0 = 2

PD300 User Manual
54
4.12.2 Cooling curves

The cooling curve has the following formula:
Being:
Tf = final temperature
Ti = initial temperature
t = time
= cooling time constant
From Ti = 1 (100 in %), the temperature at which the trip occurs, in order to reach a final temperature Tf = 0 (that is,
with current I = 0), the formula will be reduced to:
Example: cooling curve with a 3 minute constant
Examples combining heating and cooling:

1. Lets assume that for 200 sec it is heated with I/I0 =1, the following 200 sec (without tripping) withI/I0 = 2, and from
that point it returns indefinitely to I/I0 = 1 (both 3-minute time constants):

PD300 User Manual
55

2. Lets assume that for 200 sec it is heated with I/I0 =0.5, and then with I/I0 = 1.5 up to reach the 100%, when it trips.
From that moment it gets cold with I//I0 = 0 (both 3-minute time constants):
4.13 BREAKER
4.13.1 Breaker failure protection
It has independent units for each of the breakers.
Output relays can be programmed as follows:
breaker failure to close. It works watching the "state 52" input
breaker failure to open. It works watching the "state 52" input
failure to open with overcurrent. It operates according to a group of settings generically called "Breaker failure":
Enable function
Phase drop out current
Neutral drop out current ( in 2-winding models)
Re-trip definite time
Trip definite time
If the function is enabled it operates as follows: if the unit gives a trip signal or an external protection actuation signal is
received through a digital input, a timer is activated and it must be checked if the winding maximum phase current
exceeds the amount programmed as "phase drop out current" or the neutral (neutral 1 and neutral 2 measurements)
exceeds the "neutral drop out current". The signals generated are the following:
Retrip: if once the trip definite time is passed, the winding maximum phase current and/or neutral current exceeds the
amount programmed.
Failure to open with overcurrent: if once the trip definite time is passed, the phase current and/or neutral current
exceeds the amount programmed.
These signals are only deactivated when the phase and neutral currents are below their restoring values.
If a LED has been programmed as a Breaker failure (failure to open with overcurrent)it is activated as the relay, but it
can only be deactivated by recognising through keyboard/display in Last fault as the LEDS that set trips.
The external protection signal is internally memorized, that is, it may be an impulse type signal.
In this type of operation, the current values are taken into consideration and not the digital input of the breaker status.

PD300 User Manual
56

The settings are in the Console on the winding breaker screen:
Setting
Enable
Phase drop out (A)
Neutral drop out (A)
Definite time (sec)
Trip definite time (sec)
Min.
Max.
Step
0.1
0.02
0.1
0.02
0.05
0.05
160.0
32.0
160.0
32.0
60.00
60.00
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
Notes
YES/NO
In = 5 A
In = 1 A
In = 5 A
In = 1 A
The retrip definite time must be lower than the trip definite time.
4.13.2 Operation Logic

It has two independent units for each of the breakers.
Trip sealing: If set on "YES" when a trip signal is activated, it is kept this way until you see the breaker open, although the
trip cause has disappeared. If set on "NO" the trip signal disappears when its cause disappears (although the relay
excitation is guaranteed for at least the time programmed in the digital outputs programming.).
Close sealing: If set on "YES" when a close command occurs, it is kept this way until you see the breaker close, although
the command has disappeared. If set on "NO" the close signal disappears when the command disappears (although the
relay excitation is guaranteed for at least the time programmed in the digital outputs programming.).
The open and close failure time units allow enough time from the moment the corresponding command is issued and the
breaker actuation signal is received, in order to consider it has worked correctly. If such is not the case, a signal is created
for failure to open and another one for failure to close.
The setting is in the Console on the Winding breaker screen:
Setting
Trip sealing
YES/NO
Close sealing
YES/NO
Breaker failure to open time unit (sec) 0.1 5.0 0.01
Breaker failure to close time unit (sec) 0.1 5.0 0.01
4.13.3 Breaker supervision

A signal is created every time that, after a trip, the kI2 counter exceeds the programmed threshold. At any time the
counter can be reset to its initial value by command.
For the calculation of the pole wear, the desired calculation type can be programmed among kI2*t, kI2 and kI.
If Ki2 is chosen, the kA2 are calculated, being I the current measured after elapsing the waiting time set after the trip.
If kI is chosen only the sum of the currents in kA is calculated, being I the current measured after elapsing the waiting
time set after the trip.
If Ki2 *t is chosen, the Ki2 /100 value is being accumulated every 10ms, being I the current measured after elapsing
the waiting time set after the trip. It finishes accumulating when I < 0.05 A.
The setting is in the Console on the Winding breaker screen.
Setting
Min. Max.
Step Notes
65534 1
Alarm threshold kI2 0
0
65534 1
Initial value kI2
4.13.4 Coil supervision


PD300 User Manual
57

The trip and close circuit supervision allow checking the continuity of the circuits of the trip and close coils, when the
breaker is both open or close (see the connection procedure example). The supervision inputs have to be assigned (open
circuit with open breaker and with close breaker, close circuit with open breaker and with close breaker).
The setting is in the Console on the Winding breaker screen
Setting
Enable trip circuit supervision
YES/NO
Enable close circuit supervision
YES/NO
In the following figure, an example of the close coil supervision connection is shown. The trip coil connections would be
similar.
When the broker is closed, the 52a contact is also closed, and if there is continuity in the circuit, the input programmed
as Coil supervision with 52 closed is seen as closed: if there was no continuity, it would be seen as open (circuit
failure).
When the broker is open the 52b contact is, and if there is continuity in the circuit, the input programmed as Coil
supervision with 52 open is seen as closed: if there was no continuity, it would be seen as open (circuit failure).
The close circuit failure or open circuit failure signals are activated 20 s after the failure is detected, in case it
remains after that time, keeping activated while the failure is kept.

PD300 User Manual
58
DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTION
5. DATA ACQUISITION FUNCTION

5.1 EVENTS REPORTS
The following shows a list of events the protection is able to generate (if it has the corresponding functions, which are optional in
many cases). Each event incorporates its date and time and the differential currents as well as the available analogue input
measurements. The protection system saves a queue of 400 events on the volatile memory that can be retrieved from the PC.
Setting changes
Activation table 1
Activation table 2
Activation table 3
Activation table 4
Change setting table 0
Communications
Local mode (acts from keyboard/display)
Local mode (acts through front port)
Remote mode (acts through rear port)
Protection state
Relay in service
Relay out of service
Selfchecking
Relay off
Relay on
Power supply low
Critical Hardware error
Converter reference voltage error
Converter error
FLASH memory recording error
Relays activation error
SPI communication error (between micro and DSP)
Non critical Hardware error
"
clock synchronization
Error de HW corrected

PD300 User Manual
59
Inputs
Activation of digital input xx (1 to 17)
Deactivation of digital input xx (1 to 17)
Command (for each breaker)

Breaker closure
Breaker opening
Breaker close command (control message or input)
Breaker open command (control message or output)
Winding1 breaker opening
Breaker failure (for each breaker)

Breaker failure output activation
Breaker output activation in tripping circuit.
Breaker output activation in closing circuit.
Failure 52 pickup by phase current
Failure 52 trip by phase current
Failure 52 retrip by phase current
Failure 52 restore by phase current
Failure 52 pickup by neutral current
Failure 52 trip by neutral current (for G1 and G2)
Failure 52 retrip by neutral current (for G1 and G2)
Failure 52 restore by neutral current (for G1 and G2)
Exceeded the maximum of the circuit breaker supervision accumulator
Overflow of the circuit breaker supervision accumulator
Current at zero after command
Differential Protection
Pick-up phase A percent differential unit
Pick-up phase B percent differential unit
Pick-up phase C percent differential unit
Activation phase A percent differential trip output
Activation phase B percent differential trip output
Activation phase C percent differential trip output
Pick-up phase A instantaneous differential unit
Pick-up phase B instantaneous differential unit
Pick-up phase C instantaneous differential unit
Activation phase A instantaneous differential trip output
Activation phase B instantaneous differential trip output
Activation phase C instantaneous differential trip output
Restricted earth pick-up 1
Restricted earth trip 1
Restricted earth pick-up 2
Restricted earth trip 2

PD300 User Manual
60

Activation close locking
Deactivation close locking
Protection (for each winding)

Phase A timed pick-up
Phase B timed pick-up
Phase C timed pick-up
Neutral timed pick-up
Phase A instantaneous pick-up
Phase B instantaneous pick-up
Phase C instantaneous pick-up
Neutral instantaneous pick-up
Activation of phase A timed output.
Activation of phase B timed output.
Activation of phase C timed output.
Activation of neutral timed output.
Activation of phase A instantaneous output.
Activation of phase B instantaneous output.
Activation of phase C instantaneous output.
Activation of neutral instantaneous output.
Current unbalance timed pick-up
Current unbalance instantaneous pick-up
Activation of current unbalance timed output
Activation of current unbalance instantaneous output
Thermal image alarm
Thermal image trip
Earthed protection (G1 and G2)

Timed pick-up
Timed trip
Instantaneous pick-up
Instantaneous trip
Frequency and overexcitation protection

Trip by minimum frequency (step 1)
Trip by maximum frequency
Trip by overexcitation V/f step 1
Trip by overexcitation V/f step 2
Trip by overexcitation 5th harmonic

PD300 User Manual
61
5.2 FAULT RECORDS

The protection stores in non-volatile memory a queue of the 20 last faults retrievable from the PC with the following information:
Available units
Units tripped during fault
Units picked up during fault
Fault starting date and time (first picked up unit)
Tripping date and time (first picked up unit)
Fault ending date and time (when the trip signal disappears
Current cleared by the winding (maximum of phase currents detected between the moment of the tripping order and the
breaker opening)
Settings group active during the fault
Type of fault and type of trip: 3 letters (general and by winding).
For general reasons, DIF is shown for differential faults, GND for restricted earth, N for neutral, F for frequency, V for
overvoltage, 5 for 5th harmonic overexcitation and E for V/f overexcitation.
For each winding, it is formed by combinations of the following characters: A, B, C, R, D, I, depending on what it has
tripped in each phase, residual, unbalance, thermal image. For example: AC is a two-phase fault phase A and C.
Differential current (module and angle) in phase A fault and prefault
Differential current (module and angle) in phase B fault and prefault
Differential current (module and angle) in phase C fault and prefault
Current restraint (module and angle) in phase A fault and prefault
Current restraint (module and angle) in phase B fault and prefault
Current restraint (module and angle) in phase C fault and prefault
Phase A current (module and angle) in each winding fault and prefault.
Phase B current (module and angle) in each winding fault and prefault.
Phase C current (module and angle) in each winding fault and prefault.
Neutral current (module and angle) in fault and prefault. Only in 2 winding models. It gives the measurement of the two
neutral.
Voltage (module and angle) in fault and prefault. Only in 2 winding models
The currents and the voltages in fault are simultaneous and they are those that exist at the moment of the tip command.
The currents and the voltages in pre-fault are simultaneous and they are those that existed 3 cycles before the pickup.
Besides they are stored in non-volatile memory and the data corresponding to the last ten faults can be retrievable through the
keyboard/display:
Phases that have been tripped.
Each phase differential current and restraint current at the moment of the trip.
Each phase and neutral current at the moment of the trip.
Data and starting and ending time of the fault.
5.3 MEASUREMENTS
The available measurements depends on the model:
2 winding model: voltage, current and ground measurements, but it does not have winding 3 phase measurements.
3 winding models: winding 3 phases measurements, but it does not have voltage, frequency and neutral measurements.

PD300 User Manual
62
5.3.1 Measurements at the secondary

They are measurements referred to the fundamental component, which are the ones used by the protection functions: The
differential and restraint measurements are viewed according to the reference shown in the setting winding comparation.
The measurements of 2nd/2nd+4th shown is the magnitude selected in the energization restrain.
5.3.1.1 By keyboard/display
Differential measurements
Phase A fundamental component (module)
Phase B fundamental component (module)
Phase C fundamental component (module)
Phase A 2nd/2nd+4th harmonic component (module)
Phase B 2nd/2nd+4th harmonic component (module)
Phase C 2nd/2nd+4th harmonic component (module)
Phase A 5th harmonic component (module)
Phase B 5th harmonic component (module)
Phase C 5th harmonic component (module)
Phase A restraint current (module)
Phase B restraint current (module)
Phase C restraint current (module)
In each winding:
Phase A current (module in Amperes and angles in degrees)
Phase B current (module in Amperes and angles in degrees)
Phase C current (module in Amperes and angles in degrees)
In 2 winding models:
Voltage (module in Amperes and angles in degrees)
Neutral current 1 (module in Amperes and angles in degrees)
Frequency
All the arguments are referred to the voltage (2 winding models) or to the phase A current of the winding 1 (3
winding models).
5.3.1.2 By PC (Protection Console)

They are on the first of the STATUS screens
Differential measurements:
Phase A fundamental component (module)
Phase B fundamental component (module)
Phase C fundamental component (module)
Phase A 2nd/2nd+4th harmonic component (module)
Phase B 2nd/2nd+4th harmonic component (module)
Phase C 2nd/2nd+4th harmonic component (module)
Phase A 5th harmonic component (module)

PD300 User Manual
63

Phase B 5th harmonic component (module)
Phase C 5th harmonic component (module)
Phase A restraint current (module)
Phase B restraint current (module)
Phase C restraint current (module)
In each winding:
Phase A current (module in Amperes and angles in degrees)
Phase B current (module in Amperes and angles in degrees)
Phase C current (module in Amperes and angles in degrees)
Current maximeter (in Amperes)
Thermal Image temperature
In 2 winding models:
Voltage (module in Amperes and angles in degrees)
Frequency
All the arguments are referred to the phase A phase to ground voltage.
5.3.2 Measurements at the primary

They appear on the screens MEASUREMENTS
Phase A current of each winding(in Amperes)
Phase B current of each winding (in Amperes)
Phase C current of each winding (in Amperes)
Average current of each winding (in Amperes)
Current maximeter of each winding (in Amperes)
Simple voltage
Frequency (in Hz)
5.4 MEASUREMENT HISTORICAL REPORT

The protection keeps in non-volatile memory a queue of 4000 historical measurement records, about the available winding
currents (2 or 3 depending on the model) and retrievable from a PC (Protections console).
Each record includes the maximum and minimum average currents of each winding (computed within a programmable time
window) detected during an also programmable register period. The currents are secondary Amperes.

PD300 User Manual
64

The settings used are the following ones:
Setting
Time window for measurement (min.)
Historical register period (min.)
Recording day mask
Mask disable
Register start time
Register end time

1
15
1
1
1440
1
Monday to Sunday YES/NO
YES/NO
0
24
1
0
24
1
The operation is as follows; every second the current values are added to their respective accumulators (average of the three
phases); when the time window is fulfilled, the accumulated value is divided by the number of the window seconds, in order to
get the average value. When the programmed register interval is fulfilled, the maximum and minimum values of the
measurements obtained during that interval are registered.
The register interval is automatically synchronized with the clock, so if it is programmed to 15 minutes, 4 registers an hour will
be carried out, that is, after 0, 15, 30 and 45 minutes.
The operation of the recording day mask:
If the Mask disable setting is at YES the record is carried out every day of the week. If it is at NO what has been
programmed for each day must be taken into account. If one day is at YES it is recorded, and if it is at NO it is not recorded.
5.5 STATISTICAL DATA

The same information can be obtained by keyboard / display or through PC (screen "STATISTICAL DATA"):
kI2 sum (square kA interrupted by each breaker).
Each breaker openings counter (by tripping or by manual opening)
Each breaker trip counter (by tripping)
All these counters can be set to 0, and the kI2 sum set to the initial value programmed as setting.)
In the keyboard/display there is a pick up counter available, which indicates the number of times the unit has been switched or
reseted. With this counter anomalies in the supply or in the unit can be detected.
5.6 PROTECTION STATUS

5.6.1 By keyboard / display
It can be seen:
Date and time of the relay.
Status of each of the digital inputs: open (A) or closed (C).
5.6.2 Through PC (Protections Console)

On the "STATUS" screens, apart from the measurements already mentioned, it is possible to see:
on the screen 1
Date and time of the relay
Active table

PD300 User Manual
65

on the screen 2 and 3
Protection units picked up at the present moment
Protection units tripped at the present moment
on the screen 4
Units tripped on the last trip
on the screen 5
Command orders
Breaker supervision status
Closing and trip circuit supervision status
on the screen 6
Status of digital inputs, digital outputs and LEDs
5.7 OSCILLOGRAPH DATA RECORDER

It has a 1200 cycle capacity, being programmable the number of cycles per perturbation, so if, for example, 40 cycle/register is
programmed, there will be room for 30 registers, if 120 cycles/register there will be room for 10, etc. The number of cycles
previous to the pick-up is also programmable between 1 and 100. On each record there are up to 9 analogue channels registered
and up to 32 digital channels, which can be chosen from a list selected from the available signals.
Each record can be started by a rising slope of each of the digital signals considered by the protection model.
The analogical channels are sent to the console multiplied by the transformation ratio so that they appear on primary values. The
number of samples per analogue channel cycle is 32.

PD300 User Manual
66
OTHER FUNCTIONS
6. OTHER FUNCTIONS
6.1 TIME SETTING AND SYNCHRONIZATION
6.1.1 Time setting
It can be done from the keyboard/display (within "Settings (change)") or from the Protection Console (Screen 1 "STATUS").
6.1.2 Synchronization
There is an input for synchronization demodulated by IRIG-B (see section IRIG-B input inside Technical
characteristics). This system allows the time assigning to events among connected devices to be synchronised within a
1ms margin.
The IRIG-B time code is a mesh generated once a second. The code used is B 003, in which the mesh is constituted by a
pulse train with TTL levels of variable widths. The time it shows, corresponds to the PPS (pulse per second) which
coincides with the Mesh Reference mark of the mesh beginning. There are two options:
Format B002: the year is not sent in the message.
Format B002 with IEEE 1344: the year is sent in the message.
If there is synchronization through irig-b, synchronization is not allowed through keyboard or communications.
In Integrated Control Systems (SIPC) of the unit, it is periodically synchronized (every minute) by the UCS. In this case, it
is worthless to carry out a change of time by keyboard or Protection Console, because in a short time it will be eliminated
by the UCS.
6.2 CONTROL MESSAGES

The protection responds to the following control messages
Measurements, changes and counters request Digital status request
Clock synchronization
Statistical data initialization commands
Commands for relays and specified digital signals
Statistical data request
The transmitted measurements and the order they are sent is programmable. In the Available signals appendix all the available
measurements and the order they leave the factory with are shown. The scale background indicates corresponds to 4095 counts.
The digital signals treated (changes and states) are those indicated in the Available Signal appendix. The signals to be sent and
their position can be programmed in any protocol.
The statistical data initialisation commands make possible to set at 0 the opening counters, trips, the maximeter and setting the
initial value programmed as sum kI2.
The command orders are programmable in any protocol. In the Available Signal appendix all the available orders and the value
they leave the factory with are shown...

PD300 User Manual
67
OTHER FUNCTIONS
6.3
LOCAL/REMOTE COMMAND
The unit can be in local or remote (Tele-control) mode.

The transition from one mode to the other one can be made by digital input, if there is one programmed for that purpose or by
command. The operation is alternative, that is, each time the input is pressed or activated (rising slope) the status is changed.
The control commands described in the previous section are only operative on the Remote mode. The opening and closing
commands by digital input (if they are programmed) are as much operative on the Local mode as on the Remote (to make
possible the operation from contacts activated by a remote station).
Unit in LOCAL status:
It admits commands through the front plate keyboard (if they are enabled by setting).
It admits commands through Digital Input.
It admits the output activation commands, the breaker triggering commands and so on, ended in Local in order to be used
from the Console.
It does not admit the remaining control commands.
It admits the command to PASS to REMOTE.
Unit in REMOTE status:
It does not admit commands through the front plate keyboard.
It admits commands through Digital Input.
It does not admit the local Console commands (those ending in Local).
It admits the remaining control commands.
It admits the command to PASS to LOCAL.
When the unit starts, it always happens on the Remote mode.
6.4 COMMANDS BY KEYBOARD

If FUNCTIONALS have been programmed in Pushbuttons by keyboard/display, commands can be executed from the keys
located in the unit front plate. Key and the one of the desired function must be simultaneously pushed.
Programming which command is going to be executed with each key is carried out through the console in the Command
Configuration screen.
In the first row all the keys that can be used appear, with the ON and OFF indications, since they operate as a two-state, and
when changing its state they execute the programmed command.
The pushbuttons execute the programmed command when pushing them (they differ from open, Close command in the fact
that . has to be pushed at the same time in order to execute them.). The keys execute the command when pushing them at the
same time as .
The row PUSHBUTTON TYPE (confirmation) can be programmed at NO, so the command is immediately executed, or at
YES, so confirmation is requested through the display, which is validate with Intro; if confirmation is not wanted, push
ESC.
It is possible programming several commands for the same key; they are sequentially executed (upside down).

PD300 User Manual
68
OTHER FUNCTIONS
6.5 POWER SUPPLY SUPERVISION

Only in models with this option. This function detects the power supply voltage drop under a level that guarantees the correct
display of the digital input state. This function is enabled by setting (configuration setting), but the limits for the detection are
fixed according to the selection of the auxiliary power supply (see model coding):
Power supply Detection level
125/220 Vdc 84 V
24/48 Vdc
17 V
The agony signal is activated when the power supply is under the detection level corresponding to the supply time. In this
situation the protection:
is set out of service
generates Hardware Error and low power supply signals
6.6 EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY SUPERVISION

Only available in those models with Battery voltage measurement.
This function checks if the external supply voltage is inside the margin set. It generates two signals:
Auxiliary power supply higher than maximum threshold. If the supply voltage exceeds the maximum set threshold.
Auxiliary power supply lower than maximum threshold. If the supply voltage is lower than the minimum set threshold.
The settings of this function are the following ones:
Setting
Enable
YES/NO
Minimum threshold (V) 20
220
1
Maximum threshold (V) 24
280
1
6.7 TEMPERATURE SUPERVISION

This function checks if the unit temperature is inside the set margin. It generates two signals:
Temperature higher than maximum threshold. If the temperature exceeds the maximum set threshold.
Temperature lower than minimum threshold. If the temperature is lower than the minimum set threshold.
The settings of this function are the following ones:
Setting
Enable
YES/NO
Minimum threshold () -40
0
1
Maximum threshold () 50
100
1

PD300 User Manual
69
OPERATION MODE
7. OPERATION MODE
7.1 THROUGH KEYBOARD/DISPLAY
7.1.1 Introduction
The purpose of the keyboard/display is the local introduction to the unit of settings and commands, and the view of
settings, measurements and faults through display.
7.1.2 Elements of the keyboard /display unit

They are 8, which can be programmed to show some of the status indicated in the section "Programming of LEDs".".
It is alphanumerical, liquid crystal type and has 2 rows of 16 columns each.
They are 16, signalized as
, ,INTRO, ESC, (dot) and the numbers from 0 to 9
7.1.2.1 Pushbutton ""

It is the only push-button accessible with the protection cover on.
By successive pushing the following information starts to appear
Digital inputs status
Phase A, B and C current (of each winding)
Neutral current (only in 2 winding model)
Voltage (only in 2 winding model)
Phase A, B and C differential current
Phase A, B and C restraint current
Last fault information
Phases involved
Phase A, B and C current (of each winding)
Neutral current (only in 2 winding model)
Voltage (only in 2 winding model)
Phase A, B and C differential current
Phase A, B and C restraint current
Start data and time
End data and time
Fault acknowledgement (press 2 sec. and release). Turn the tripping LEDs off
7.1.2.2 R Pushbutton
It rearms the closing unlock function 86

PD300 User Manual
70
OPERATION MODE
7.1.3 Operating mode

7.1.3.1 General description
At standby, the display shows the PD-300 and the software version it contains.
At any time of the process, which is described below, the pressing of the key ESCAPE takes the unit to the
menu element of the immediately precedent level.
The menus will be scrolled downwards or upwards with the keys "" and "", and they are circular this means
that after the last position, the first will return again.
Generally, when a menu is scrolled, the first line of the display shows the active function, which can be
entered by pressing INTRO, and, in this way, we can reach the next menu level (if there is any), specific for
that function.
The menu tree to visualize or change settings within each group is hierarchical. If at resting status (title) we
press INTRO, we will reach the first element of the following menu:
SEE TIME
SEE ACTIVE TABLE
INPUTS
MEASUREMENTS
STATISTICAL DATA
LAST FAULT
SETTINGS (see)
SETTINGS (change)
The complete hierarchy of menus and submenus is represented in the Keyboard/display Appendix.
7.1.3.2 Using the keyboard/display

7.1.3.2.1 See settings and magnitudes
With the keys and we can scroll inside each menu or submenu (as shown above) up
or down, as the menus are circular.
By pressing INTRO we enter the next menu level. If there is no submenu by pressing
INTRO the display state does not change.
The pressing of ESC takes us to the immediate upper level of the menu, this means, the
one from which we reached the actual status.
In the final menus, which are the ones with no submenus (settings), the group setting name,
selected by keyboard appears in the first row, while in the second row there appears its
present value.
7.1.3.2.2 Change settings

Up to the last level of the menus everything works in the same way as in Settings (see) and
magnitudes (same functions for same keys).
To access to this function, it is necessary to press the key "". Through this all settings
and initializations are made accessible, except the ones contained in the section "Define
protection. To get access to them, the key "" is necessary.
In the last level of the menus, where the name of the settings we want to change appear, the
keyboard operation is different from the one we have explained until now.
When entering into each group to change the settings, which are included (final menu), the
keyboard operation will be as it follows:

PD300 User Manual
71
OPERATION MODE
1) Numerical settings. The first line of the display shows the name of the selected setting
followed by its current value. The line 2 shows the text NEW followed by the current setting
range, which can be changed by using the numerical keyboard.
To change the setting range we use the numerical keyboard, along with the DOT. The new
range has to be literally entered; this means that if we wish to enter the new value of 3.2 the
key 3 will have to be pressed, then the key DOT followed by the key 2. If the value is not
valid, when pushing INTRO to access to the next setting, a warning message will be shown
on the line 2 indicating INVALID VALUE. A valid value will have to be entered to be able to
access the next setting within the group, by pressing INTRO. The pressing of ESC within
the final menu takes us to the menu element, which we came from, without making effective
the changes we have made until the moment of pressing.
The changes are made effective when at the moment of reaching the last group setting and
pressing INTRO, we receive the message VALIDATE SETTINGS and press INTRO to
validate the changes; if we validate them by pressing INTRO, we would return to the next
element of the menu above (see menus chart). By pressing ESC we return to the menu
element from which we reached the present state.
2) Non numerical settings. There are settings such as the enabling settings, where it must be
chosen between YES or NO, ON and OFF. There are also calendar masks which can be
enabled every other day, there are time delayed curves with a certain name, inputs and
outputs configurations etc. where is more clear to select them by their name rather than by
introducing their numerical value.
Whenever possible and clear, on the line 1 the name of the setting will appear along with a
text indicating the actual value. On the second line it will gradually appear the possible
values to choose for this setting, if we use the keyboard properly. We use the key to go
through the different possibilities we have on each state. In the case of inputs, outputs or
leds configuration we can use the keys and to select the configuration of each of
them; we do it this way because there are many configurations to choose from and this makes
it quicker.
By pressing INTRO we access to the next setting within the group, if there is any, and if
there is not any we validate the value chosen on the line 2. That is, in groups with an only
element, the validate option, which is present in the different groups with more than one
element, will not appear. In these, an only element cases, there is no need to confirm the
validation, if we want to leave the setting as it was, we press ESC and the setting will not
change.
In the case of inputs, outputs, leds configuration, the pressing of INTRO takes us from
configuring the input/output/led i to configuring input/outputs/led i+1. The same occurs with
the inputs mask and the calendar mask which runs trough the days of the week by each
pressing of INTRO; within each day it could be chosen between YES and NO with the
arrow .
As for the numerical settings, the pressing of ESC takes us to the menu element from
which we reach the present status.
3) Initializations and special settings.
Within the first submenu of "Change settings" we find the option: "INITIALIZE, MAXIM, kI2."
where, by pushing INTRO, we can reach:
"OPEN Dx=0?" by pushing INTRO the maximeter is set to 0.
"TRIPS Dx=0?" by pushing INTRO the maximeter is set to 0.
"MAXIMETER Dx=0?" by pushing INTRO the maximeter is set to 0.
"KI2 Dx=INIT. DX?" by pushing INTRO the accumulator takes the setting value of
corresponding to the table indicated by the active table.
"RESET QUEUES?"; by pushing INTRO all queues of events, faults, historic and oscillograph
data record are reset.
Being x the winding number

PD300 User Manual
72
OPERATION MODE
Change of active table

In the first level of "SETTINGS (change)", pressing "INTRO" when by "ACTIVATE TABLE"
appears "TABLE 1"; with the arrows and we can go on to "TABLE n" (n is the number of
tables). When the aimed one is reached, press "INTRO" to activate it.
Last 10 fault view through display

When entering the LAST FAULT menu, there are 10 submenus with the following text:
Fault 1 is the most recent one and 10 the oldest one. By entering any of them through
INTRO the data of the corresponding fault can be seen.
FAULT No. n
DATA
TIME
When entering fault 1, fault is allowed to be recognised (switch off leds, etc). But it does not
occur with the remaining faults.
By pushing ESC the previous level is accessed.
Last fault automatic display

When there is a trip, the beginning of the fault report appears in the display, so, if pushing
, you can get access to all the information.
If the fault is recognised or ESC is pushed, the first screen with the relay description is
accessed.
Idle status without pulses

If no key is pushed for 5 minutes, the relay moves back to the idle screen. The screen
displayed in this situation can be configured. By pushing the keys and ESC at the
same time; the screen that is being displayed changes into idle screen. If the key ESC is
pushed, the idle screen changes again into the relay description.
7.2 USING THE PC

The PD300 protection relays can be monitorized through a PC. That way, you can get access to the measurement and system
setting displaying, as well as to their programming.
The PC program, Protection Console Developer by Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution SA is called SIPCON/P.

PD300 User Manual
73
RECEPTION, STORAGE, INSTALLATION AND TESTS
8. RECEPTION, STORAGE, INSTALLATION AND TESTS

8.1 RECEPTION AND STORAGE
The protections are supplied in special packing material for transport.
Upon reception, they should be checked for any signs of external damage caused during transport; if so the transport firm and
manufacturer should be contacted.
The material received should also be checked to see if it coincides with the order number.
If the protection is not going to be used immediately, it should be stored in its original packaging and in a dry and dirt free
place.
The unit transport must be made in its original packaging.
8.2 CONNECTING PROCEDURE

The protection connecting procedure should be carried out in accordance with the enclosed external connection diagram. It is
a general diagram; the programming of inputs and outputs should be taken into consideration in each specific case.
Power supply
The polarity is indifferent.
Earth connection
It is important for the earth connection to be correctly connected, in order for the protection disturbance rejection devices it
incorporates to operate properly. The connection should be as short as possible (less than 25 cm.) using multiwired cable
2
with a 4 mm cross-section.
RS232 cable connections to be used between the PC and the PL300 unit
Case 1: a 25-pin PC output connector:
PD300 side
PC side
Female 9-pin socket
female 25-pin socket
RxD
TxD
TxD
RxD
GND
GND
DSR
20 DTR
RTS
CD
CTS
CTS
CD
RTS
DSR
DTR

PD300 User Manual
74

Case 2: a 9-pin PC output connector
PD300 side
PC side
Female 9-pin socket
female 9-pin socket
RxD
TxD
TxD
RxD
GND
GND
DSR
DTR
RTS
CD
CTS
CTS
CD
RTS
DSR
DTR
8.3 UNIT ADDRESSING

See Communications configuration section.
8.4 COMMISSIONING
The PL300 protections are received with the default settings stipulated by the factory.
Before commissioning they must be set, through the keyboard/display and/or PC, with the correct values for the application,
following the setting procedures.
The protection has been checked at the factory in order to guarantee its accuracy in all of the setting points of the different
parameters. However, it is convenient to test some points during reception and commissioning, in order to ensure it is totally
in proper operating condition.
Once the line is connected the real measurements the relay is carrying out can be displayed, thus enabling you to check for
proper connection and operation.

PD300 User Manual
75
DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT CALCULATION
APPENDIX I.
The differential and restraint current measurement of each phase depends on the fact that if it as a 2 or 3 winding model. The
settings used are those mentioned the Unit configuration section.
The differential current used in each phase protection functions matches the following formula:
I _ dif =
I
I1
I
C1 + 2 C 2 + 3 C3
Tap1
Tap 2
Tap3
Where:
I1, I2, I3 correspond to each winding currents compensated according the wiring procedure
Tap1, Tap2, Tap3 correspond to each winding restraint currents.
C1, C2, C3 It shows the wiring compensation (1 1/3 ) of each winding (tables 1 and 2)
The viewed differential current (state, fault, display...) refers to the winding selected by the Winding selection setting, where
Tapn shows the de through current of this winding (I_difref). In case None is selected, the viewed differential current is I_dif.
I _ dif ref = Tap n (
I
I1
I
C1 + 2 C 2 + 3 C3 )
Tap1
Tap 2
Tap3
Winding current
In tables 3, 4 and 5 the current calculation regarding the wiring and the timetable code is shown. These calculations match the
ABC phase sequence, in case of using ACB all the equations resulting C times B and B times C.
When entering a table having a code as difference between H2 and H3, in case the subtraction is negative, 12 must be added
before entering the table.
Through current or tap.

It is introduce by means of setting or it is calculated from the winding data. Each winding tap calculation (n) from the setting is
the following:
If the Power maximum capacity setting is different to 0
TAPn = MVA1000 / (RTIn KVn 3)
where n shows the winding
RTI: transformer winding ratio
KV: Winding nominal phase to phase voltage
The obtained tap value must be between the limits:
0.5 to 100A for In=5A
0.1 to 20 for In=1A
Otherwise, it will be fixed in the maximum if the result is higher or in the minimum if it is lower.
If the Power maximum capacity setting is 0
TAPn is the Winding through current setting.
Monopole filter
The homopole filter can be enabled by setting.
No. The homopole filter is not applied
Yes. It is applied when a homopole sequence current can flow through one of the windings (star), but not through the other
(delta). In these cases the external faults to ground can cause a wrong operation of the differential unit. It is avoid by
subtracting (filtering) in the differential current components the homopole sequence of he wiring groups needed (although
it is never damaging). The current of each phase is:
Ia = Ia (Ia + Ib + Ic)/3

PD300 User Manual
76

Ib = Ib (Ia + Ib + Ic)/3
Ic = Ic (Ia + Ib + Ic)/3
In. It is only applied to 2 winding models. It is the same as in the previous case, but instead off using the homopole current, it
uses the neutral current. The neutral transformer must be associated to that winding
I.1. 2-WINDING MODELS

The wiring procedures and the timetable codes allowed to each one are shown in this table
Table 1. 2-winding wiring procedures
Winding 1
Y
Y
Y
D
D
D
Z
Z
Z
Winding 2
y
d
z
y
d
z
y
d
z
Timetable code
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
C1
1
1/3
1/3
1
1
1
1
1
1
C2
1
1
1
1/3
1
1
1/3
1
1
Restraint current:
I restra int_ 2 w
I1
I
C1 + 2 C 2
Tap1
Tap2
=
2
The calculation for each of the wiring procedures is shown in the following lines:
GROUP Yy
In this wiring procedure, each phase current refers to the primary, taking into account the transformation due to the wiring
procedure type.
Winding 1 currents: each phase measurement with homopole filter.
Winding 2 currents: according to table 4 with timetable code H and homopole filter.
GROUPS Yd, Yz
In these wiring each phase current refers to the secondary, taking into account the transformation due to the wiring procedure
type.
Winding 1 currents: according to table 3 with timetable code H. The homopole filter is not affected.
Winding 2 currents: each phase measurement with homopole filter
GROUPS Dy, Zy
In these wiring each phase current refers to the primary, taking into account the transformation due to the wiring procedure
type.
Winding 2 currents: according to table 5 with timetable code H. The homopole filter does not affect.
GROUPS Dd, Dz, Zd, Zz

In these wiring each phase current refers to the primary, taking into account the transformation due to the wiring procedure
type.
Winding 2 currents: according to table 4 with timetable code H and homopole filter.

PD300 User Manual
77
I.2. 3-WINDING MODELS

The wiring procedures and the timetable codes allowed for each one is shown in the following table:
Table 2. 3-winding wiring procedures

Winding 1
Y
Y
Y
Y
D
D
D
D
Winding 2
y
y
d
d
y
y
d
d
Winding 3
y
d
y
d
y
d
y
d
Timetable code 2
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
Timetable code 3
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
C1
1
1/3
1/3
1/3
1
1
1
1
C2
1
1/3
1
1
1/3
1/3
1
1
C3
1
1
1/3
1
1/3
1
1/3
1
Restraint current:
I restra int_ 3w =
I
I1
I
C1 + 2 C 2 + 3 C 3
Tap1
Tap2
Tap3
2
The calculation for each of the wiring procedure is shown below:
GROUP Yyy
Winding 2 currents: according to table 4 with timetable code H2 and with homopole filter.
GROUP Yyd
Winding 1 currents: according to table 3 with timetable code H3.
Winding 2 currents: according to table 3 with timetable code H3-H2.
GROUP Ydy
Winding 1 currents 1: according to table 3 with timetable code H2.
Winding 3 currents: according to table 5 with timetable code H3-H2
GROUP Ydd
Winding 1 currents according to table 3 with timetable code H2.
Winding 2 currents each phase measurement with homopole filter.
Winding 3 currents: according to table 4 with timetable code H3- H2 and with homopole filter.
GROUP Dyy
GROUP Dyd
Winding 2currents: according to table 5 with timetable code H2.

PD300 User Manual
78
GROUP Ddy
GROUP Ddd
TABLE 3 Group Yd, Yz

Timetable code Reference Winding Modified Winding Modified winding
A
A = A-C
B = B-A
C = C-B
1
C
B
B
C
""
A = B-C
B = C-A
C = A-B
A = B-A
B = C-B
C = A-C
""
A
B
""
A = C-A
B = A-B
C = B-C
A = C-B
B = A-C
C = B-A
""
C
A
11
""
A = A-B
B = B-C
C = C-A

PD300 User Manual
79
TABLE 4 Group Yy, Dd, Dz, Zd, Zz

Timetable code Reference Winding Modified Winding
A
A = A
B = B
C = C
0
C
Modified winding
""
A = -B
B = -C
C = -A
B
C
A = C
B = A
C = B
""
""
A = -A
B = -B
C = -C
10
A = B
B = C
C = A
""
A
""
A = -C
B = -A
C = -B

PD300 User Manual
80
TABLE 5 Group Dy, Zy

Timetable code Reference Winding
Modified Winding Modified winding

A
A = A-B
B = B-C
C = C-A
1
C
B
B
C
""
A = C-B
B = A-C
C = B-A
B
C
A = C-A
B = A-B
C = B-C
""
A
B
""
A = B-A
B = C-B
C = A-C
A
B
A = B-C
B = C-A
C = A-B
""
C
A
11
""
A = A-C
B = B-A
C = C-B

PD300 User Manual
81
GENERATOR PROTECTION
APPENDIX II.
The generator protection works as a 2-winding protection, but with some conditions in the following functions:
Percent and instantaneous differential protection

The harmonic restraint is disabled in the generator applications.
There is an additional setting for the enabling of the frequency differential protection inhibition:
Parameter
Frequency filter enable
YES/NO
Percent and instantaneous differential protection operation according to this setting is the following one:
With the frequency filter enabled: it only operates within the frequency range 5 Hz of the nominal frequency (45 to 55 for 50
Hz and 55 to 65 for 60), so the phase voltage connection is necessary for the frequency measurement (see wiring
diagram).
With the frequency filter not enabled: it operates regardless of the frequency measurement.
The percent differential protection settings are those below:
Setting
Enable
Sensitivity (xTap)
Istep 1 (xTap)
I step 2 (xTap)
1 (%)
2 (%)
Additional time (s)

YES/NO
0.02
2
0.01 See note
0
2
0.01
0
20
0.01
5
100
1
5
200
1
0
60
0.01
The percent differential protection settings are those below:

Enable
Minimum Maximum Step YES/NO
Enable
YES/NO
Trip (xTap)
0.6
4
0.01
Additional time (s) 0
60
0.01
Note: The sensitivity value must fulfil that:
Tapmin imum Sensitivity 0.02In
Being In the current rate (5A). Otherwise, the sensitivity value is automatically modified in order to fulfil it.
The sensitivity and restraint currents are indicated in tap steps.
Restricted earth
The restricted earth protection settings are those below:
Setting
Enable
YES/NO
Trip (A)
0.05
4
0.01
Additional time (s)
0
60
0.01
Comparation winding
Wind 1, Wind 2 or Autotrafo
General settings for the differential protections

When applying to a generator, the following must be taken into account:
The winding 2 nominal voltage is the same as the winding 1 nominal voltage.
The connection type for both windings is Y.
The schedule code is 0.
The single-pole enabling for both windings is NO.

PD300 User Manual
82
Thermal image
The setting range of the nominal current is from 0.04A to 10A with 0.01A step.
Measurements
The measurement range for a 5A nominal current is 0.02A at 32A, being the measurement background scale 32A.
In the control measurements (see Available signals appendix), the background of the phase current of each winding is 1,2*In ,
while the last fault current one is 32A.
Available signals
The digital signals and commands will be those indicated in the available signal appendix, except those corresponding to the
non-available functions in the generator models.
2nd and 5th harmonic restraint
Pickup / Trip restricted earth unit 1 and 2
Winding 3 signals

PD300 User Manual
83
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPENDIX III. KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY

In the following pages we enclose a table, which graphically illustrates and shows the easy handling of the different menus and
settings, which can be changed with the keyboard/display. We recommend this appendix be at hand when you start to use the
keyboard, in order to find, in a easy way the settings to be changed.
The structure is generic for all the PD300 family group, that is, it does not correspond to only a certain model. In each model,
only the setting and measurements related to its available functions will appear.
The format used is the following one:
Common to all the models
2 winding models and generator

3 winding models
Generator models
Models with battery measurement
The rear protocol menu, accessible from see setting and change setting, corresponds to the one selected as rear protocol, the
remaining ones are not displayed.
DATE/TIME (see)
Units date and time are visualized.
See ACTIVE TABLE
Present active table
INPUTS
INPUTS STATUS
Status of inputs 1 to 3
(4 to 9)
(10 to 15)
(16, 17)
Status of inputs 16 and 17
MEASUREMENTS
See measurement page
STATISTICAL DATA
See statistical data page
LAST FAULTS
See last fault page
SETTINGS (see)
See setting page
SETTINGS (change)
See change setting page

PD300 User Manual
84
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED TO:
MEASUREMENT
WIND. 1 MEASURE.
CURRENTS
Phase A W1 current
Winding 1 phase A current
Phase B W1 current
Winding 1 phase B current
Phase C W1 current
Winding 1 phase C current
W1 (A) average current
Winding 1 phase average current
MAXIMETER 1 (A)
Winding 1 maximum average current
ZERO DATE
Date when the maximeter is set to 0
THERMAL IMAGE
WIND. 1 THERMAL IMAGE
Winding 1 thermal image
CURRENTS
Phase A W2 current
Phase B W2 current
Phase C W2 current
W2 (A) average current
MAXIMETER 2 (A)
ZERO DATE
THERMAL IMAGE
CURRENTS
Phase A W3 current
Phase B W3 current
Phase C W3 current
W 3 (A) average current
MAXIMETER 3 (A)
ZERO DATE
MAXIMETER
WIND.2 MEASURE.
MAXIMETER
WINDING 3 MEASURE.
MAXIMETER
THERMAL IMAGE
NEUTRAL MEASUREM
Neutral current 1 (A)
Neutral current 1
Neutral current 2 (A)

DIF. MEASUREMENT
Curr FUNDAMENTAL
Curr. ARMON 2/2+4.
Curr. ARMON 5
Curr RESTRAINT
Neutral current 2
Curr Dif. A
Fundamental harmonic phase A differential current
Curr Dif. B
Fundamental harmonic phase B differential current
Curr Dif. C
Fundamental harmonic phase C differential current
Curr Dif. A
2ND harmonic phase A differential current
Curr Dif. B
2ND harmonic phase B differential current
Curr Dif. C
2ND harmonic phase C differential current
Curr Dif. A
5TH harmonic phase A differential current
Curr Dif. B
5TH harmonic phase B differential current
Curr Dif. C
5TH harmonic phase C differential current
Curr Dif. A
Phase A restraint current
Curr Dif. B
Phase B restraint current
Curr Dif. C
Phase C restraint current
VOLTAGE MEASURE
VOLTAGE V
Voltage measurement
FREQUEN. MEASURE
FREQUENCY (Hz)
Frequency measurement
TEMPERATURE (C)
TEMPERATURE (C)
Unit temperature in C

PD300 User Manual
85
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED TO:
STATISTICAL DATA
WIND1 OPENINGS
Winding 1total opening counter
WIND2 OPENINGS
Winding 2 total opening counter
WIND3 OPENINGS
Winding 3 total opening counter
WIND1 TRIPS
Winding 1total trip counter
WIND2 TRIPS
Winding 2 total trip counter
WIND3 TRIPS
Winding 3 total trip counter
WINDING 1 SIGMA K12
Winding 1 sigma K12
WINDING 2 SIGMA K12
Winding 2 sigma K12
WINDING 3 SIGMA K12
Winding 3 sigma K12
TEMPERATUR.1 Acknow.
Winding 1 temperature reset
LAST FAULT
Fault no.

LAST FAULT PHASE
Phase/s involved in the last fault
Winding1 fault A current

Winding1 fault B current
Winding1 fault C current
Neutral 1 fault current
Neutral 2 fault current
Fault voltage
Current dif fault A
Current dif fault B
Current dif fault C
Current rest fault A
Current rest fault B
Current rest fault C
START D
END D
FAULT acknowledge

PD300 User Manual
86
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (see)
SEE TABLE 1
PROTECTION
GENERERAL PROTEC.
TRANSF CHARACT
WIND.1 V.
Winding 1 nominal voltage transformation ratio
WIND2 V.
WIND.3 V.
V.T.R.
Auxiliary voltage transformation ratio, measurements
W1 TRAFO
Winding 1 current transformation ratio
W2 TRAFO
W3 TRAFO.
G1 TRAFO
Neutral 1 transformation ratio
G2 TRAFO
Neutral 2 transformation ratio
W1 CONNECT
Winding 1 transformer connection type
ENA. HOMOP W1
Enable winding 1 homopole transformer
W2 CONNECT
W2 TIME CODE
Winding 2 time code
ENA. HOMOP W2
W3 CONNECT
W3 TIME CODE
Winding 3 time code
ENA. HOMOP W3
NUMBER OF WINDINGS
2/3 winding connection
MAX.POWER. (MVA)
Maximum power capacity(MVA)
WIND1 RESTRAINT CURR.
Winding 1 restraint current
FUNCTION 86
ENABLE FUNC. 86
Enable function 86
FREQUENCY FILTER
ENABLE
Enable frequency filter ( generator)
TRANSFORM RATIO
TRANSF. CONNECT
WINDINGS NOM CUR

PD300 User Manual
87
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (see)
SEE TABLE 1
PROTECTION
WINDING 1
PROTECTION
PHASE TOC
RESIDUAL TOC.
PHASE IOC
RESIDUAL IOC
ENABLE TIME PR..
Enable phase timing
PICK UP.
Pick up phase timing
CURVE SHAPE
Curve shape phase timing.
TIME INDEX
Time index phase timing
FIXED TIME
Fixed time phase timing
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking phase timing .
ENABLE TIME PR..
PICK UP.
Pick up residual timing
CURVE SHAPE
Curve shape residual timing.
TIME INDEX
Time index residual timing
FIXED TIME
Fixed time residual timing
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking residual timing .
ENABLE INSTANT.
Enable phase instantaneous
PICK UP INSTANT.
Pick up phase instantaneous
ADDITIONAL TIME
Fixed time phase instantaneous
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking phase instantaneous
ENABLE INSTANT.
Enable residual instantaneous
PICK UP INSTANT.
Pick up residual instantaneous
ADDITIONAL TIME
Fixed time residual instantaneous
BLOCKING SIGNAL
IOC
.HIGH
PHASES IOC HIGH
INST..RESID. HIGH
UNBALANCE TOC
UNBALANCE IOC
THERMAL IMAGE
BREAKER
FAILURE..
Blocking residual instantaneous

ENABLEINSTANT.
Enable level 2 phase instantaneous
PICK UP INSTANT.
Pick up level 2 phase instantaneous
ADDITIONAL TIME
Fixed time level 2 phase instantaneous
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking level 2 phase instantaneous
ENABLE INSTANT.
Enable level 2 residual instantaneous
PICK UP INSTANT.
Pick up level 2 residual instantaneous
ADDITIONAL TIME
Fixed time level 2 residual instantaneous
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking level 2 residual instantaneous
ENABLE TIME PR..
Enable unbalance timing
PICK UP.
Pick up unbalance timing
CURVE SHAPE
Curve shape unbalance timing.
TIME INDEX
Time index unbalance timing
FIXED TIME
Fixed time unbalance timing
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking unbalance timing
ENABLE INSTANT.
Enable unbalance instantaneous
PICK UP INSTANT.
Pickup unbalance instantaneous
ADDITIONAL TIME
Fixed time unbalance instantaneous
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking unbalance instantaneous
THERM. IMAGE
ENABLE.
Enable thermal image
HEATING CONSTANT.
Heating constant thermal image
COOLING CONSTANT.
Cooling constant thermal image
ALARM TRESHOLD
Alarm threshold thermal image
BASE CURRENT
Base current (In)
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking thermal image
BREAKER FAIL ENABLE
Enable breaker failure
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking breaker failure
PHASES RESTORE
Restore breaker failure phases
GROUND RESTORE
Restore breaker failure neutral
RETRIP FIXED T
Retrip time breaker failure
TRIP FIXED T
Trip time breaker failure

PD300 User Manual
88
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (see)
SEE TABLE 1
PROTECTION
WINDING 2 PROTECTION
PHASE TOC
RESIDUAL TOC.
PHASE IOC
RESIDUAL IOC
ENABLE TIME PR..
Enable phase timing
PICK UP.
CURVE SHAPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
ENABLE TIME PR..
PICK UP.
CURVE SHAPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
ENABLE INSTANT.
PICK UP INSTANT.
ADDITIONAL TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
ENABLE INSTANT.
PICK UP INSTANT.
ADDITIONAL TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
IOC
.HIGH
PHASES IOC HIGH
INST..RESID. HIGH
UNBALANCE TOC
UNBALANCE IOC
THERMAL IMAGE
BREAKER FAILURE..

ENABLE INSTANT.
PICK UP INSTANT.
ADDITIONAL TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
ENABLE INSTANT.
PICK UP INSTANT.
ADDITIONAL TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
ENABLE TIME PR..
PICK UP.
CURVE SHAPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
ENABLE INSTANT.
PICK UP INSTANT.
ADDITIONAL TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
THERMAL IMAGE ENABLE.
HEATING CONSTANT.
COOLING CONSTANT.
ALARM TRESHOLD
BASE CURRENT
Base current (In)
BLOCKING SIGNAL
BREAKER FAIL ENABLE
BLOCKING SIGNAL
PHASES RESTORE
GROUND RESTORE
RETRIP FIXED T
TRIP FIXED TIME
Trip fixed time breaker failure

PD300 User Manual
89
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (see)
SEE TABLE 1
PROTECTION
WINDING 3 PROTECTION
PHASE TOC
RESIDUAL TOC.
PHASE IOC
RESIDUAL IOC
ENABLE TIME PR..
Enable phase timing
PICK UP.
CURVE SHAPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
ENABLE TIME PR..
PICK UP.
CURVE SHAPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
ENABLE INSTANT.
PICK UP INSTANT.
ADDITIONAL TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
ENABLE INSTANT.
PICK UP INSTANT.
ADDITIONAL TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
IOC
.HIGH
PHASES IOC HIGH
INST..RESID. HIGH
UNBALANCE TOC
UNBALANCE IOC
THERMAL IMAGE
BREAKER FAILURE..

ENABLE INSTANT.
PICK UP INSTANT.
ADDITIONAL TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
ENABLE INSTANT.
PICK UP INSTANT.
ADDITIONAL TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
ENABLE TIME PR..
PICK UP.
CURVE SHAPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
ENABLE INSTANT.
PICK UP INSTANT.
ADDITIONAL TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
THERMAL IMAGE ENABLE.
HEATING CONSTANT.
COOLING CONSTANT.
ALARM TRESHOLD
BASE CURRENT
Base current (In)
BLOCKING SIGNAL
BREAKER FAIL ENABLE
BLOCKING SIGNAL
PHASES RESTORE
GROUND RESTORE
RETRIP FIXED T
TRIP FIXED TIME
Trip fixed time breaker failure

PD300 User Manual
90
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED TO
SETTINGS (see)
SEE TABLE 1
PROTECTION
GROUND PROT.
RESTRICT EARTH 1
RESTRICT EARTH 2
GROUND 1 TOC
GROUND 2 TOC
GROUND 1 IOC
GROUND 2 IOC
ENABLE
Enable restricted earth unit1
PICK-UP
Pick up restricted earth unit1
ADDITIONAL TIME
Additional time restricted earth unit1
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking restricted earth unit1
COMPARA WINDING
Comparation winding restricted earth unit1
ENABLE
Enable restricted earth unit2
PICK-UP
Pick up restricted earth unit2
ADDITIONAL TIME
Additional time restricted earth unit2
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking restricted earth unit2
COMPARA WINDING
Comparation winding restricted earth unit2
ENABLE TIME PR.
Enable timing neutral 1
PICK-UP
Pick-up timing neutral 1
CURVE SHAPE
Curve shape timing neutral 1
TIME INDEX
Time index timing overI neutral 1
FIXED TIME
Fixed time timing neutral 1
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking timing neutral 1
ENABLE TIME PR.
Enable timing neutral 2
PICK-UP.
Pick-up timing neutral 2
CURVE SHAPE
Curve shape timing neutral 2
TIME INDEX
Time index timing overI neutral 2
FIXED TIME
Fixed time timing neutral 2
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking timing neutral 2
ENABLE INSTANT
Enable level 1 instantaneous neutral 1
PICK-UP INSTANT.
Pickup level 1 instantaneous neutral 1
ADDITIONAL TIME
Fixed time 1 instantaneous neutral 1
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking level 1 instantaneous neutral 1
ENABLE INSTANT
PICK-UP INSTANT.
ADDITIONAL TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
GROUND IOC HIGH
GROUND IOC 1
GROUND IOC 2
Blocking level 1 instantaneous neutral 2

ENABLE INSTANT
PICK-UP INSTANT.
ADDITIONAL TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking input level 2 instantaneous neutral 1
ENABLE INSTANT
PICK-UP INSTANT.
ADDITIONAL TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking input level 2 instantaneous neutral 2

PD300 User Manual
91
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (see)
SEE TABLE 1
PROTECTION
DIFFERENTIAL PROT.
PERCENT DIFF
INSTANT DIFF
INRUSH RESTRAINT
OVEREXCIT. RESTRAINT.
ENABLE
Enable differential
SENSITIVITY xIn
Sensitivity (xIn)
RESTRAINT 1 xIn
Restraint current 1
RESTRAINT 2 xIn
Restraint current 2
Slope 1 (%)
Slope 1 (%)
Slope 2 (%)
Slope 2(%)
ADDITIONAL TIME
Additional time percent differential l
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking percent differential
ENABLE INSTANT
Enable instantaneous differential
PICK UP xIn
Pickup instantaneous differential
ADDITIONAL TIME
Additional timing instantaneous differential
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking instantaneous
INRUSH ENABLE
INRUSH restraint enable
INRUSH LEVEL (%)
INRUSH restraint level
INRUSH THRESHOLD
Minimum fundamental current (A)
OVEREXCIT.ENABLE
Overexcitation restraint enable
OVEREXCI. LEVEL.(%)
Overexcitation restraint level
OVEREXC. THRESHOLD
ADDITIONAL PR.
FRECUEN. MIN/MAX
STEP FREQUENCY. 1
STEP FREQUENCY 2
STEP FREQUENCY. 3
STEP FREQUENCY. 4
STEP FREQUENCY. 5
GENERALS OF FREQ.
OVERVOLTAGE
INST. OVERVOLTAGE
TIME UNDERVOLTAGE
INST. UNDERVOLTAGE
5 HARM OVEREXC
Minimum fundamental current (A)

FREQUENCY ENABLE
Enable frequency step 1
FREQUENCY (HZ)
Frequency step 1
ADDITIONAL TIME
Time frequency step 1
FREQUENCY TYPE
Frequency type frequency step 1
FREQUENCY ENABLE
FREQUENCY (HZ)
Frequency step 2
ADDITIONAL TIME
FREQUENCY TYPE
FREQUENCY ENABLE
FREQUENCY (HZ)
Frequency step 3
ADDITIONAL TIME
FREQUENCY TYPE
FREQUENCY ENABLE
FREQUENCY (HZ)
Frequency step 4
ADDITIONAL TIME
FREQUENCY TYPE
FREQUENCY ENABLE
FREQUENCY (HZ)
Frequency step 5
ADDITIONAL TIME
FREQUENCY TYPE
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Frequency blocking (generic)
MIN VOLTAGE SPV.
Supervision minimum voltage
PICKUP CYCLES No.
Number of frequency pickup cycle
ENABLE
Enable overvoltage
PICKUP
Overvoltage pickup threshold s
ADDITIONAL TIME
Overvoltage fixed time
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking overvoltage
ENABLE
Enable overvoltage
PICKUP
Overvoltage pickup threshold s
ADDITIONAL TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
ENABLE
Enable undervoltage
PICKUP
Undervoltage pickup threshold
CURVE
Undervoltage curve time
INDEX
Time index. Undervoltage
ADDITIONAL TIME
Undervoltage fixed time
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking undervoltage
ENABLE
Enable undervoltage
PICKUP
ADDITIONAL TIME
Undervoltage fixed time
BLOCKING SIGNAL
ENABLE
Enable overexcitation 5 harmonic
MINMIMUM CURRENT
Operation minimum current(xIn)
PICK UP
Pickup threshold (%)
ADDITIONAL TIME
Fixed time overexcitation 5 harmonic
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking overexcitation 5 harmonic

PD300 User Manual
92
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (see)
SEE TABE 1
PROTECTION
ADDITIONAL PROT
V/f OVEREXC. 1
V/f OVEREXC. 2
WINDING SELECT
OPERATION LOGIC
SPV.INTER.WIND1
SPV.INTER.WIND2
SPV.INTER.WIND. 3
WINDING SUPERV
HISTORICALS
ENABLE
Enable V/f overexcitation unit 1
OPER MINIMUM V
PICK UP
Pickup threshold V/f overexcitation unit 1
CURVE TYPE
Unit 1 V/f curve type
TIME INDEX
Unit 1 V/f time index
ADDITIONAL TIME
Fixed time V/f overexcitation unit 1
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking V/f overexcitation unit 1
ENABLE
Enable V/f overexcitation unit 2
OPER MINIMUM V
PICK UP
Pick up threshold V/f overexcitation unit 2
CURVE TYPE
Unit 2 V/f curve type
TIME INDEX
Unit 2 V/f time index
ADDITIONAL TIME
Fixed time V/f overexcitation unit 2
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking V/f overexcitation unit 2
WINDING SELECT
Selection reference winding
TRIP LATCH
Trip latch breaker 1
OPEN FAIL T.
Open failure timing (sec)breaker 1
CLOSE LATCH
Close latch breaker 1
CLOSE FAIL T
Close failure timing (sec)breaker 1
K12 SUM TRESHOLD
KI2 alarm threshold breaker 1
INITIAL K12 SUM
Sum KI2 initial value breaker 1
CALCULATION TYPE
Sum KI2 calculation type
WAITING TIME
Waiting time after trip
TRIP LATCH
OPEN FAIL T.
CLOSE LATCH
CLOSE FAIL T
K12 SUM TRESHOLD
INITIAL K12 SUM
CALCULATION TYPE
WAITING TIME
TRIP LATCH
OPEN FAIL T.
CLOSE LATCH
CLOSE FAIL T
K12 SUM TRESHOLD
INITIAL K12 SUM
CALCULATION TYPE
WAITING TIME
TRIP 1 CI SPV EN
Enable the winding 1 trip circuit supervision
CLOS 1 CI SPV EN
Enable the winding 1 close circuit supervision
TRIP 2 CI SPV EN
CLOS 2 CI SPV EN
TRIP 3 CI SPV EN
CLOS 3 CI SPV EN
WINDOW for AVERAG
Time window sample average calculation
RECORDING INTERV
Historical recording interval
CALENDAR MASK.
Calendar mask for week days
START TIME
Daily register initial time
END TIME
Daily register end time

PD300 User Manual
93
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED FOR:
SETTINGS (see)
SEE TABLE 2
Same as table 1
SEE TABLE 3
Same as table 1
SEE TABLE 4
Same as table 1
SEE TABLE 5
Same as table 1
SEE TABLE 5
SETTINGS (see)
SEE TABLE 0
Same as table 1
CONFIGURE I/O
CONFIG.INPUTS
INPUTS
Input configuration
SELECT. NO/NC
OUTPUTS
GENERALS
ACTIVATION TIME
Input activation time
OUTPUT N
SIGNALS
Output configuration signals
OUTPUT TYPE
Output type configuration
OUTPUT ACTIV. TIME
ACTIV TIME Sn
LEDS
LED n
RELAY SERVICE
Output activation time (new)

SIGNALS
Programmable LEDs configuration
MEMORIZEDO
LED type configuration

Relay in service
BREAKER NUMBER
COMUNICATIONS
See NO/NC inputs
ACTIVATION TIME
Breaker number
PROTOCOL.COM2
PROTOCL.COM2
See select rear communication type
PORT COM1
UCL ADDRESS
Protection address
BAUD RATE
Baud rate (bauds)
TYPE OF PARITY
Parity
STOP BITS
Stop bit number
PORT COM2 (PROCOME)
UCL ADDRESS
Protection address
(if Procome)
BAUD RATE
Baud rate (bauds)
TYPE OF PARITY
Parity
STOP BITS
Stop bit number
CONTROL SIGNALS
None / RTS
PORT COM2 (DNP)
UCL ADDRESS
UCL address for DNP communications.
(if DNP)
MASTER DIRECTION
Master address for DNP communications.
BAUD RATE
Baud rate in DNP communications
TYPE OF PARITY
Parity in DNP communications
STOP BITS
Stop bits for DNP communications.
RTS FIXED
Channel type for DNP communications
COMMUN. CONTROL
RTS and CTS control for DNP communications
CTS. WAIT T. (sec)
CTS waiting time for DNP
POR. WAIT T (sec)
CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications
STABILI. T (sec)
Stabilization time for DNP communications
ACK.WAIT T (sec)
Waiting time confirm. Link for DNP
SYNCHRON T (sec)
Synchronization time for DNP communications
ACK. LINK
Link confirm. for DNP communications
APPLIC.M. BYTES N..
Application messages bytes number for DNP
CHANGES T.
Change sending time for DNP communications
FROZEN T.
Counter frozen time for DNP
STATUS SENDING
Status sending for DNP communications
MESURES BITS N.
Measurement format for DNP communications
COUNTERS BITS N.
Counter format for DNP communications
NOT REQUESTED MSG
Not requested message sending for DNP
PREV.COLLISION
Collision prevision for DNP communications
COL. FIXED T.. (sec)
Collision fixed time for DNP communications
COL. VBLE.. T. (sec)
Collision variable time for DNP
RESENDING T
Non-requested message resending time for DNP
NOT REQUEST MAX NUM.
Maximum number of non-requested messages for DNP.
ESPECIAL
Especial for DNP communications
MEASURES FORMAT
Measurement format for DNP communications

PD300 User Manual
94
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED FOR:
SETTINGS (see)
SEE TABLE 0
CONFIG.COMMUNI.
REAR PORT (MOD-BUS)
UCL ADDRESS
UCL address
(if MOD-BUS)
BAUD RATE
Communication baud rate
PARITY TYPE
parity
RTS. ACT. WAIT T.
RTS activation waiting time
CARRIER WAIT T.
Carrier waiting time
RTS. DEACT. WAIT T.
RTS deactivation waiting time
MEASURE FORM MOD.BUS

PORT COM2 (101)
GENERALS
(if 101)
ASDU FIELDS
FORMATS
ADDRESSES
Measurement format for MOD-BUS communication

LINK ADDRESS
Remote station number at link level
APPLIC. ADDRESS
Remote station number at application level
BALANCED
Communication in balanced mode or not
BAUD RATE
Baud rate
CHANNEL TYPE
Communication channel type
RTS AND CTS
RTS and CTS control
TYPE OF PARITY
Parity
STOP BITS
Stop bits
CTS. WAIT T. (sec)
CTS waiting time
POR. WAIT T (sec)
RTS ACTIV TIME
Waiting time after RTS
RTS DEACTIV TIME
Waiting time to deactivate RTS
RESP. WAIT TIME
Waiting time to confirm received message
TIME BETWEEN
TRANSM.
Time between two transmissions
TRANS. NUMBER
Number of transmission attempts
APLIC. ADDRESS
LENGTH
Number of application address bytes
CAA LENGTH
Number of link address bytes
COT LENGTH
Number of bytes due to transmission
IOA LENGTH
Number of bytes of information field
TIME FORMAT
Time format
TIME MEASUREMENTS
Measurement sending with time
TIME COUNTER
Counter sending with time
SP ADDRESS
Address of the first information object simple signal

type
EV ADDRESS
Address of the first information object event type
DP ADDRESS
MEAS ADDRESS
Address of the first information object double

signal type
Address of the first information object
measurement type
TAP ADDRESS
Address of the first information object TAP type
COUN ADDRESS
Address of the first information object counter type
BIT ADDRESS
Address of the first information object bitstring type
OC ADDRESS
OC0 ADDRESS
OC1 ADDRESS
OC2 ADDRESS
PAR ADDRESS
Address of
type C
Address of
type CO
Address of
type C1
Address of
type C2
Address of
parameter
the first information object simple order

the first information object simple order
the first information object double order
the first information object double order
the first informat. object measurement
FULL ADDRESS
Address signalling the queue is full
HALF- FULL ADDRESS
Address signalling the queue is half-full
GPS ADDRESS
Address signalling GPS
SYNCHR. ADDRESS
Address signalling GPS synchronization

PD300 User Manual
95
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED FOR:
SETTINGS (see)
SEE TABLE 0
COMMUNICATIONS
PORT COM2 (101)
OTHER PARAMETERS
(if 101)
Fulling limit to activate the fulling alarm
% EMPTYING
Emptying limit to deactivate the fulling alarm
WORD EVENTS
Start word for the event state refreshment
COMMAND MODE
Command execution mode
COMMAND INFORMT
Sending of command return information
FREEZE
Periodical counter operation mode
MEAS. PAR. ADDRESS
Same address for measurements and for

measurement parameters
META PROFILE.
Meta reduced profile
GPS
GPS installation
TRANSMIS. FACTOR
Transmission factor time
ASDU SIZE
Maximum number of bytes in the ASDU
BIT SQ
Sending of compacted messages
COM2 PORT
UCL ADDRESS
UCL address
(If 103)
BAUD RATE
Baud rate
PARITY T.
Parity
STOP BITS
Number of stop bits
RTS ACT. T
CARR. T.
RTS DEACT. T.
SEND FORMAT
Compatible VDEW/Extended
SEL COM TCP/IP
Select the protocol of the Ethernet Port
SEL COM TCP/IP

DEFINE DEVICE
% FULLING
LANGUAGE
See language
SUPPLY FREQUENCY
See supply frequency
PHASE ORDER
PUSHBUTTONS
Phase order
ENABLE PUSHBUTTONS
Enable pushbuttons
LOCKING BY COMMAND
Locking by command
SUPPLY SURVEILLANCE
EXT. SUPPLY SURVEILLANCE.
TEMPERAT. SURVEILLANCE
FORMAT IRIG-B
Enable supply surveillance

ENABLE
Enable external supply surveillance
ALAR. MIN. THRESHOLD
Alarm minimum threshold
ALAR. MAX. THRESHOLD
Alarm maximum threshold
ENABLE
Temperature surveillance
ALAR. MIN. THRESHOLD
ALAR. MAX. THRESHOLD
FORMAT IRIG-B
Select Irig-B format

PD300 User Manual
96
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED FOR:
SETTINGS (change)
CHANGE DATE
ACTIVATE TABLE
CHANGE DATE
Change date
CHANGE TIME
Change time
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid date and time change
ACTIVATE TABLE 1
Activate table 1
ACTIVATE TABLE 2
Activate table 2
ACTIVATE TABLE 3
Activate table 3
ACTIVATE TABLE 4
Activate table 4
ACTIVATE TABLE5
Activate table 5
ACTIVATE TABLE 6
PROGRAM TABLE 1
PROTECTION
Activate table 6
GENERALS OF PROTEC
TRANSF CHARACTER
TRANSF RATIO
TRANSF CONNECT
WINDING NOMI. CURR
FUNCTION 86
FREQUENCY FILTER
WIND. 1. V
Winding 1 nominal voltage transformation ratio?
WIND. 2 V
WIND. 3. V
V.T.R-
Auxiliar voltage transformation ratio ,measurement?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid voltage transformer setting?
W1. TRAFO
Winding 1 current transformation ratio?
W2. TRAFO
W3. TRAFO
G1 TRAFO
Ground 1 transformation ratio?
G2 TRAFO
Ground 2 transformation ratio?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid transformation ratio?
W1 CONNECTION
Winding 1 transformer connection type?
ENA HOMOP W1
Enable homopole winding 1 transformer?
W2 CONNECTION
Connection type winding 2 transformer?
W2 TIME CODE
Winding 2-time code?
ENA HOMOP W2
W3 CONNECTION
Ti Connection type winding 3 transformer?
W3 TIME CODE
Winding 3 time code?
ENA HOMOP W3
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid trafo connection?
MAX. (MVA)
Maximum power capacity (MVA)?
W1 STEP C
Winding 1 step current?
W2 STEP C
W3 STEP C
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid winding nominal current (tap)?
ENA.FUNC. 86
Enable function 86?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid function 86 settings
ENABLE
Enable frequency filter ( generator)
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid function 86 setting?

PD300 User Manual
97
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED TO
SETTINGS (change)
PROGRAM TABLE 1
PROTECTION
WIND1 PROTECTION
PHASE TOC
RESIDUAL TOC
PHASES IOC
RESIDUAL IOC
ENABLE
Enable phase timing?
PICK UP
Pick up phase timing?
CURVE SHAPE
Curve shape phase timing?
TIME INDEX
Curve index phase timing?
FIXED TIME
Fixed time phase timing?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking phase timing??
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid settings?
ENABLE
Enable residual timing?
PICK UP
Pick up residual timing?
CURVE SHAPE
Curve shape residual timing?
TIME INDEX
Curve index residual timing?
FIXED TIME
Fixed time residual timing?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking residual timing??
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid residual timing settings?
ENABLE
Enable phase instantaneous?
PICK UP
Pick up phase instantaneous?
ADD.TIME
Fixed time phase instantaneous?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking phase instantaneous?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid settings?
ENABLE
Enable level 1 residual instantaneous?
PICK UP
Pickup level 1 residual instantaneous?
ADD.TIME
Fixed time level 1 residual instantaneous?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking level 1 residual instantaneous?
NEW PAR VALID?

HIGH IOC
INST..FASES HIGH
INST.RESID.HIGH
UNBALANCE TOC
UNBALANCE IOC
Valid residual instantaneous settings?

ENABLE
Enable level 2 phase instantaneous?
PICK UP
Pickup level 2 phase instantaneous?
ADDITIONAL TIME
Fixed time level 2 phase instantaneous?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking level 2 phase instantaneous?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid phase instantaneous settings?
ENABLE
PICK UP
ADDITIONAL TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?
ENABLE
Enable unbalance timing?
PICK UP
Pick up unbalance timing?
CURVE SHAPE
Curve shape unbalance timing?
TIME INDEX
Time index unbalance timing?
FIXED TIME
Fixed time unbalance timing?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking unbalance timing?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid unbalance timing setting?
ENABLE
Enable unbalance instantaneous?
PICK UP
Pick up unbalance instantaneous?
ADDITIONAL TIME
Fixed time unbalance instantaneous?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking unbalance instantaneous?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid unbalance instantaneous setting?

PD300 User Manual
98
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED TO
SETTINGS (change)
PROGRAM TABLE 1
PROTECTION
WIND 1 PROT
THERMAL IMAGE
BREAK FAIL. PROT.
WIND 2 PROT
PHASE TOC
RESIDUAL TOC.
PHASE IOC
RESIDUAL IOC
ENABLE
Enable thermal image?
HEAT CONSTANT
Heat constant thermal image?
COOL CONSTANT
Cool constant thermal image?
ALARM TRES
Alarm threshold thermal image?
BASE CURR
Base current (In) ?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking thermal image?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid thermal image setting?
ENABLE
Enable breaker failure?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking breaker failure?
PHASE RES
Phases restore breaker failure?
GND RES.
Neutral restore breaker failure?
RETRIP T
Fixed time breaker failure 2nd trip?
TRIP T
Fixed time breaker failure?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid breaker failure setting?
ENABLE
PICK UP
CURVE SHAPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid settings?
ENABLE
PICK UP
CURVE SHAPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?
ENABLE
PICK UP
ADD TIME.
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid settings?
ENABLE
PICK UP
ADD TIME.
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?

HIGH IOC
PHASES IOC HIGH
RESIDU IOC.HIGH

ENABLE
PICK UP
ADD TIME.
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?
ENABLE
PICK UP
ADD TIME.
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid level 2 residual instantaneous settings?

PD300 User Manual
99
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED TO
SETTINGS (change)
PROGRAM TABLE 1
PROTECTION
WIND 2 PROTECTION
UNBALANCE TOC.
UNBALANCE IOC
THERMAL IMAGE
BREAKER FAIL. P..
WIND 3 PROTECTION
PHASES TOC
RESIDUAL TOC
PHASE IOC
RESIDUAL IOC
ENABLE
PICK UP
CURVE SHAPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?
ENABLE
PICK UP
ADD TIME.
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?
ENABLED
HEAT CONST
Thermal image heating constant?
COOL CONST
Thermal image cooling constant?
ALARM THRES.
Thermal image alarm threshold?
BASE CURR
Base current (In) ?
LOCKING SIGNAL
Thermal image locking?
NEW PAR VALID?
Validate thermal image settings?
ENABLED
LOCKING SIGNAL
Locking breaker failure?
REPOS. PHASE
Reposition of breaker failure phases?
REPOS. GND
Reposition of breaker failure ground?
RETRIP TIME
Definite time 2nd trip breaker failure?
TRIP TIME
Definite time breaker failure?
NEW PAR VALID?
Validate breaker failure settings?
ENABLE
PICK UP
CURVE SHAPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid settings?
ENABLE
PICK UP
CURVE SHAPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?
ENABLE
PICK UP
ADD TIME.
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid settings?
ENABLE
PICK UP
ADD TIME.
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?
Enable instantaneous residual settings?

PD300 User Manual
100
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (change)
PROGRAM TABLE 1
PROTECTION
WIND 3 PROTECTION
HIGH IOC
PHASES IOC
RESID. IOC HIGH
UNBALANCE TOC
UNBALANCE IOC
THERMAL IMAGE
BREAK FAIL. PROT.
ENABLE
PICK UP
ADD TIME.
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?
ENABLE
PICK UP
ADD TIME.
Fixed time level 2 residual

instantaneous?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid level 2 residual instantaneous

settings?
ENABLE
PICK UP
CURVE SHAPE
TIME INDEX
FIXED TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?
ENABLE
PICK UP
ADDITIONAL TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?
ENABLE
HEAT CONSTANT
Heat constant thermal image?
COOL CONSTANT
Cool constant thermal image?
ALARM TRES
Alarm threshold thermal image?
BASE CURR
Base current (In) ?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking thermal image?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid thermal image setting?
ENABLE
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking breaker failure?
PHASE RES
Phases restore breaker failure?
GND RES.
Neutral restore breaker failure?
RETRIP T
TRIP T
Fixed time breaker failure?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid breaker failure setting?

PD300 User Manual
101
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED TO
SETTINGS (change)
PROGRAM TABLE 1
PROTECTION
GROUND PROT
RESTRIC EARTH 1
RESTRIC EARTH 2
GROUND 1 TOC
GROUND 2 TOC
GROUND 1 IOC
GROUND 2 IOC
ENABLE
Enable restricted earth unit 1?
PICK UP
Pick up restricted earth unit 1?
ADDITIONAL TIME
Additional time restricted earth unit 1?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking restricted earth unit 1?
COMPAR. WINDING
Comparation winding restricted earth unit 1?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid settings restricted earth unit 1?
ENABLE
Enable restricted earth unit 2?
PICK UP
Pick up restricted earth unit 2?
ADDITIONAL TIME
Additional time restricted earth unit 2?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking restricted earth unit 2?
COMPAR. WINDING
Comparation winding restricted earth unit 2?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid settings restricted earth unit 2?
ENABLE
Enable ground timing 1?
PICK UP
Pick up ground timing 1?
CURVE SHAPE
Curve shape ground 1?
TIME INDEX
Time index ground 1 timing overcurrent?
FIXED TIME
Time index ground 1 timing ?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking ground 1 timing?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid setting ground 1 timing?
ENABLE
Enable ground 2 timing?
PICK UP
Pick up ground 2 timing?
CURVE SHAPE
Curve shape ground 2 timing?
TIME INDEX
Time index ground 2 timing overcurrent?
FIXED TIME
Time index ground 2 timing
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking ground 2 timing?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid setting ground 2 timing?
ENABLE
Enable level1 ground 1 instantaneous?
PICK UP
Pick up level1 ground 1 instantaneous?
ADDITIONAL TIME
Fixed time level1 ground 1 instantaneous?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking level1 ground 1 instantaneous?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid setting ground 1 instantaneous?
ENABLE
PICK UP
ADDITIONAL TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?

INST. GND .HIGH
HIGH GND 1
HIGH GND 2

ENABLE
PICK UP
ADDITIONAL TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?
ENABLE
PICK UP
ADDITIONAL TIME
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?

PD300 User Manual
102
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (change)
PROGRAM TABLE 1
PROTECTION
DIFFERENTIAL PROT
PERCENT DIFFER
ENABLE
Enable differential?
SENSITIVITY
Sensitivity (xIn)?
RESTR 1 (In)
Restraint 1 current?
RESTR 2 (In)
Restraint 2 current?
SLOPE 1 (%)
Slope 1 (%)?
SLOPE. 2 (%)
Slope 2(%)?
ADD TIME.
Additional time percent

differential l?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking percent differential?

Valid percent characteristic
settings?
Enable instantaneous
differential?
Pick up instantaneous
differential?
Instantaneous differential
additional timing?
NEW PAR VALID?

INSTANT DIFFER
ENABLE
PICK UP (In)
ADD TIME.
INRUSH RESTRAINT
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking instantaneous?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid instantaneous
differential settings?
ENABLE
Enable INRUSH restraint?
RESTRAINT (%)
Pick up INRUSH restraint?

Fundamental minimum
differential threshold
Valid INRUSH restraint
settings
DIF.THRESHOLD
NEW PAR VALID
OVEREXC. RESTRAINT
ENABLE
Enable overexcitation restraint?
RESTRAINT (%)
Overexcitation restraint level?

Fundamental minimum
differential threshold
Valid overexcitation restraint
settings
DIF.THRESHOLD
NEW PAR VALID??
ADDITIONAL PROT
HIGH/LOW FREQUEN
STEP FREQUENCY. 1
STEP FREQUENCY. 2
STEP FREQUENCY 3
STEP FREQUENCY. 4
STEP FREQUENCY. 5
GENERALS OF FREQ.
ENABLE
Enable step 1 frequency?
FREQUENCY. (HZ)
Step 1 frequency?
ADD. TIME
Step 1 frequency timing?
FREQ TYPE
Step 1 frequency type ?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid step 1 frequency?
ENABLE
Enable step2 frequency?
FREQUENCY.(HZ)
Step 2 frequency?
ADD. TIME
FREQ TYPE
NEW PAR VALID?
ENABLE
Enable step3 frequency?
FREQUENCY.(HZ)
Step3 frequency?
ADD. TIME
FREQ TYPE
NEW PAR VALID?
ENABLE
FREQUENCY.(HZ)
Step 4 frequency?
ADD. TIME
FREQ TYPE
Step 4 frequency type?
NEW PAR VALID?
ENABLE
FREQUENCY.(HZ)
Step 5 frequency?
ADD. TIME
FREQ TYPE
Step 5 frequency type?
NEW PAR VALID?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Prog. Frequency blocking.

(generic)?
MIN. VOLT
Supervision minimum voltage?
CYCLES N
NEW PAR VALID?
Number of frequency pickup

cycles?
Valid supervision minimum
voltage?

PD300 User Manual
103
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (change)
PROGRAM TABLE 1
PROTECTION
ADDITIONAL PROT
OVERVOLTAGE
INST.
OVERVOLTAGE
ENABLE
Enable overvoltage?
PICK UP
Overvoltage pickup threshold?
ADD TIME.
Overvoltage fixed time?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking overvoltage?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid overvoltage setting?
ENABLE
Enable overvoltage?
PICK UP
Overvoltage pickup threshold?
ADD TIME.
Overvoltage fixed time?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking overvoltage?
NEW PAR VALID?

TIME
UNDERVOLTAGE
ENABLE
Enable undervoltage
PICK UP
CURVE
Undervoltage curve type
INDEX
Time index. Undervoltage
ADD TIME.
Undervoltage definte time
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?

INST.
UNDERVOLTAGE
ENABLE
Enable undervoltage
PICK UP
ADD TIME.
Undervoltage definte time
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?

SOBRETENSION
INST.
ENABLE
Enable overvoltage
PICK UP
Overvoltage pickup threshold
ADD TIME.
BLOCKING SIGNAL
NEW PAR VALID?

5 HARM OVEREXC
V/f OVEREXC.1
V/f OVEREXC.2
WINDING SELECT
ENABLE
Enable 5 harmonic overexcitation?
MIN CURR
Operation minimum current (xIn)?
PICK UP(%)
Pick up threshold (%)?
ADD TIME
5 harmonic overexcitation fixed time?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking 5 harmonic overexcitation?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid 5 harmonic overexcitation settings?
ENABLE
Enable V/f overexcitation unit1?
MIN VOLT
Operation minimum voltage?
PICK UP
V/f overexcitation unit1pickup threshold?
CURVE TYPE
Curve type time V/f unit 1?
TIME INDEX
Time index time V/f unit 1?
ADD TIME
5 harmonic overexcitation fixed time?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking 5 harmonic overexcitation?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid 5 harmonic overexcitation settings?
ENABLE
Enable V/f overexcitation unit2?
MIN VOLT
Operation minimum voltage?
PICK UP
V/f overexcitation unit1pickup threshold?
CURVE TYPE
Curve type time V/f unit 1??
TIME INDEX
Time index time V/f unit 1
ADD. TIME.
V/f overexcitation unit 2 fixed time?
BLOCKING SIGNAL
Blocking V/f overexcitation unit2?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid V/f overexcitation unit 2 settings?
WINDING SELECT
Selecting winding?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid settings?

PD300 User Manual
104
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (change)
PROGRAM TABLE 1
OPERATION LOGIC
W 1 BREAKER MON.
W 2 BREAKER MON.
W 3 BREAKER MON.
COIL SUPERV
PROG.HISTORICS
TRIP LATCH
Trip latch breaker 11?
OPEN FAIL.TIME
Open failure timing (sec) breaker 1?
CLOSE LATCH
Close latch breaker 1?
CLOSE FAIL. TIME
Close failure timing (sec) breaker 1?
KI2 TRESHOLD
KI2 alarm threshold breaker 1?
START KI2
KI2sum initial value breaker 1?
CALCULATION TYPE
ki1 sum calculation type?
WAITING TIME
Waiting time after trip?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid supervision setting breaker 1?
TRIP LATCH
OPEN FAIL.TIME
CLOSE LATCH
CLOSE FAIL. TIME
KI2 TRESHOLD
START KI2
KI2sum initial value breaker 2?
CALCULATION TYPE
K21 sum calculation type?
WAITING TIME
VALID.PARAM.NUEVO?
Valid supervision setting breaker 2?
NEW PAR VALID?
TRIP LATCH
OPEN FAIL.TIME
CLOSE LATCH
CLOSE FAIL. TIME
KI2 TRESHOLD
CALCULATION TYPE
Ki3 sum calculation type?
WAITING TIME
NEW PAR VALID?
TRIP SV. EN. 1
Enable supervision coil 1 trip circuit?
CLOSE. SV. EN. 1.
Enable supervision coil 1 close circuit?
TRIP SV. EN. 2
CLOSE. SV. EN. 2
Enable supervision coil 2 close circuits??
TRIP SV. EN. 3
CLOSE. SV. EN. 3.
Enable supervision coil 3 close circuit?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid winding supervisions?
WIND AVERAGES
Time window to calculate sample average?
RECORD I
Historic record interval?
CALENDAR MASK
Prog. Calendar mask for days of the week?
START TIME
Daily register start time?
END TIME
Daily register end time?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid changes in Historics?
PROGRAM TABLE 2
Program table 2. The same as program Table 1
PROGRAM TABLE 3
PROGRAM TABLE 4
PROGRAM TABLE 5
PROGRAM TABLE 6

PD300 User Manual
105
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (change)
PROGRAM TABLE 0
CONFIGURE I/O
CONFIG. INPUTS
PROG. INPUTS
SELECT.NO/NC
ACTIVATION TIME
PROG. OUTPUTS
ACT. OUT. TIME
PROG.OUTPUTS
INPUTS n
Configure inputs?
NEW PAR VALID??
Valid changes in the input settings?
INPUTS n
Select inputs NO/NC?
VALID IN NO/NC
Valid input selection NO/NC?
ACT. IN. TIME
Input activation time?
NEW PAR VALID??
Valid input activation time?
OUTPUT n
Configure Outputs?
OUTPUT TYPE
General trip?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid changes in the output settings?
ACT. OUT. TIME
Output activation time?
NEW PAR VALID?

PROGRAM LEDS
GENERALS
COMMUNICATIONS
PROG.LEDS
Valid output activation time?

LED n
Configure LEDs?
MEMORIZED
Memorize Yes/No?
NEW PAR VALID??
Valid changes in the LED settings?
RELAY IN SERVICE
IN SERVICE
Enable relay in service?
BREAKER No.
BREAKER NUMBER
Breaker number?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid breaker number?
PROTOCOL.COM 2
See selec.communicat. type. Rear?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid. selec.communicat. type. Rear?
UCL ADDRESS
Protection address?
BAUD RATE
Baud rate(bauds)?
PARITY
Parity?
STOP BITS
Stop bit number?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid changes in communication settings?
PORT COM 2 (PROCOME)
UCL ADDRESS
Protection address?
(IF Procome)
BAUD RATE
Baud rate(bauds)?
PARITY
Parity?
STOP BITS
Stop bit number?
CONTROL SIGNALS
None / RTS
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid changes in communication settings?
PROTOCOL.COM 2
PORT COM 1

PD300 User Manual
106
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED TO
SETTINGS (change)
PROGRAM TABLE 0
COMMUNICATIONS
PORT COM 2 (DNP)
UCL ADDRESS
UCL address for DNP communications?
(if DNP)
MASTER ADDRESS
Master address for DNP communications.?
BAUD RATE
Baud rate in DNP communications?
PARITY
Parity in DNP communications?
STOP BITS
Stop bits for DNP communications. ?
RTS FIXED
Channel type for DNP communications?
COMMUNIC.CONTROL
RTS and CTS control for DNP communications?
CTS.WAIT T.
CTS waiting time for DNP?
POR. WAIT T
CARRIER waiting time for DNP communications?
STABILI. T
Stabilization time for DNP communications?
ACK.WAIT T
Waiting time to confirm link for DNP?
SYNCHRON T
Synchronization time for DNP communications?
ACK. LINK
Link confirm. for DNP communications?
APPLIC.M. BYTES N..
Application messages bytes number for DNP ?
CHANGES T.
Change sending time for DNP communications ?
FROZEN T.
Counter frozen time for DNP?
STATUS SENDING
Status sending for DNP communications?
MESURES BITS N.
Measurement format for DNP communications?
COUNTERS BITS N.
Counter format for DNP communications?
NOT REQUESTED MSG
Not requested message sending for DNP ?
PREV.COLLISION
Collision prevision for DNP communications?
COL. FIXED T..
Collision fixed time for DNP communications?
COL. VBLE.. T.
Collision variable time for DNP?
RESENDING T
Non-requested message resending time for DNP?
NOT REQUEST MAX NUM.
Maximum number of non requested messages for DNP?
ESPECIAL
Especial for DNP communications?
MEASURES FORMAT
Measurement format for DNP communications?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid changes in communications DNP?
PORT COM 2 (MODBUS)
REMOTE ADDRESS
UCL address?
(if Modbus)
COMMUNIC. BAUD RATE
Communication baud rate?
PARITY YES/NO
Parity?
RTS. ACT. WAIT T.
CARRIER WAIT T.
RTS. DEACT. WAIT T.
RTS deactivation waiting time
MEASURE FORM MOD.BUS
Measurement format for MOD-BUS communication
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid MOD-BUS settings?

PD300 User Manual
107
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED TO:
SETTINGS (change)
PROGRAM TABLE 0
COMMUNICATIONS
PORT COM2 (101)
GENERALS
(if 101)
ASDU FIELDS
FORMATS
ADDRESSES
LINK ADDRESS
Remote station number at link level
APPLIC. ADDRESS
Remote station number at application level
BALANCED
Communication in balanced mode or not
BAUD RATE
Baud rate
CHANNEL TYPE
Communication channel type
RTS AND CTS
RTS and CTS control
TYPE OF PARITY
Parity
STOP BITS
Stop bits
CTS. WAIT T. (sec)
CTS waiting time
POR. WAIT T (sec)
Carrirer waiting time
RTS ACTIV TIME
Waiting time after RTS
RTS DEACTIV TIME
RESP. WAIT TIME
Waiting time to confirm received message
TIME BETWEEN TRANS
Time between two transmissions
TRANS. NUMBER
Number of transmission attempts
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid r parameters?
APLIC. ADDRESS LENG
Number of application address bytes
CAA LENGTH
Number of link address bytes
COT LENGTH
Number of bytes due to transmission
IOA LENGTH
Number of bytes of information field
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid r parameters?
TIME FORMAT
Time format
TIME MEASUREMENTS
Measurement sending with time
TIME COUNTER
Counter sending with time
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid r parameters?
SP ADDRESS
Address of the first nformation object simple signal type
EV ADDRESS
Address of the first nformation object event type
DP ADDRESS
Address of the first nformation object double signal type
MEAS ADDRESS
Address of the first nformation object measurement type
TAP ADDRESS
Address of the first nformation object TAP type
COUN ADDRESS
Address of the first nformation object counter type
BIT ADDRESS
Address of the first nformation object bitstring type
OC ADDRESS
Address of the first nformation object simple order type C
OC0 ADDRESS
Address of the first nformation object simple order type CO
OC1 ADDRESS
Address of the first nformation object double order type C1
OC2 ADDRESS
Address of the first nformation object double order type C2
PAR ADDRESS
Address of the first nformation object measurement parameter
FULL ADDRESS
Address signalling the queue is full
HALF-FULL ADDRESS
Address signalling the queue is half-full
GPS ADDRESS
Address signalling GPS
SYNCHR. ADDRESS
Address signalling GPS synchronization
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid parameters?

PD300 User Manual
108
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
APPLIED TO
SETTINGS
(change)
PROGRAM
TABLE 0
COMMUNICATIONS
PORT COM2 (101)
OTHER PARAMETERS
(if 101)
Fulling limit to activate the fulling alarm
% FULLING
Emptying limit to deactivate the fulling

alarm
Start word for the event state
refreshment
% EMPTYING
WORD EVENTS
Command execution mode
COMMAND INFORMT
Sending of command return information
FREEZE
MEAS. PAR. ADDRESS
Same address for measurement

parameters and measurements
META PROFILE.
GPS
GPS installation
TRANSMIS. FACTOR
Transmission factor time
ASDU SIZE
Maximum number of bytes in the ASDU
BIT SQ
Sending of compacted messages
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid parameters?
COM2 PORT
UCL ADDRESS
UCL address
(If 103)
BAUD RATE
Baud rate
PARITY T.
Parity
STOP BITS
Number of stop bits
RTS ACT. T
CARR. T.
RTS DEACT. T.
SEND FORMAT
Compatible VDEW/Extended
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid parameters?
SEL COM TCP/IP
Select the protocol of the Ethernet Port
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid parameters?
LANGUAGE
Language selected?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid language change?
SUPPLY FREQUENCY
Supply frequency?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid r Supply frequency change?
PHASES ORDER
Phase order?
SEL COM TCP/IP

DEFINE DEVICE
COMMAND MODE
LANGUAGE
SUPPLY FREQUENCY
PHASES ORDER
NEW PAR VALID?

CALIBR. SET POINTS
PUHBUTTONS
SUPPLY. SURVEIL
EXT. SUPPLY SURVEIL
PERMIS. KEYWORDO
Valid Phase order?

Enter KEYWORD
Calibration keyword?
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid Calibration keyword?
HIGH PART GAIN?
High part gain?
LOW PART GAIN?
Low part gain?
LOW PART GAIN 2?
Low part gain2?
ENAB. PUHBUTTONS
Enable pushbuttons
LOCKING BY
COMMAND.
Locking by command
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid parameters?
ENABLE
Enable supply surveillance
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid parameters?
ENABLE
Enable external supply surveillance
MIN. THRESHOLD
ALAR.
MAX. THRESHOL
ALAR.
TEMPERAT. SURVEIL

NEW PAR VALID?
Valid parameters?
ENABLE
Temperature surveillance
MIN. THRESHOLD
ALAR.
MAX. THRESHOL
ALAR.

NEW PAR VALID?

TEST MODE
TEST MODE KEYWORD
Valid parameters?
Enter KEYWORD
Test mode keyword
NEW PAR VALID?

ENABLED
FORMAT IRIG-B
TEST MODE
Enable test mode
NEW PAR
VALID?
Valid parameters?
FORMATO IRIG-B
Select Irig-b format
NEW PAR VALID?
Valid parameters?

PD300 User Manual
109
KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY
INITIALIZE COUNT, MAXI,KI2..
W1 OPENINGS=0?
Set faults wind.1 to 0?
W2 OPENINGS =0?
Set faults wind.2 a 0?
W3 OPENINGS =0?
Set faults wind.3 a 0?
W1 TRIPS=0?
Set trips wind.1 to 0?
W2 TRIPS =0?
Set trips wind.2 a 0?
W3 TRIPS =0?
Set trips wind.3 a 0?
W1 MAXIMETER= 0?
Set maximeter to 0?
W2 MAXIMETER =0?
Maximeter 2 set to 0?
W3 MAXIMETER =0?
Maximeter 3 set to 0?
KI2 W1=INIT. W1?
Initialize KI2 1 sum with its value in the setting?
KI2 W2=INIT. W2?
KI2 W3=INIT. W3?
DELETE DATA?
Reset the queues?

PD300 User Manual
110
CURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS
APPENDIX IV. CURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS

IV.1. CURVES CEI 255-4./.BS142
Enclosed below are the groups of curves, according to BS142, which correspond to the following types:
Normal Inverse characteristic
Long duration curve
Short duration curve
Very Inverse characteristic.
Extremely Inverse characteristic.
Very inverse special characteristic
These curves comply with the general formula
T = M * ( I / IoK) 1
In which:
T: trip time (sec)
M: multiplier (time index). Valid range from 0.05 to 1.09 in steps of 0.01
I: Measured current
Io: Pickup current setting
K, , constants which depend on the type of curve:
Constants
K
Inverse charact. Short inverse Long inverse

0.14
0.05
120
0.02
0.04
1
Very inverse
13.50
1.00
Extremely inverse
80.00
2.00
Very inv special

2.60
1.00
The following represent the curves, which correspond to indexes 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9 and 1.0 for
each type of characteristic. Bear in mind that there are another 9 curves between each of the two curves illustrated, except
between 0.05 and 0.1, between which there are another 4.

PD300 User Manual
111
Normal inverse curve
T = M * ( I / IoK) 1
= 0,02
K = 0,14
Theoretical values given by the formula:

M \ I/Io
1.05
1.10
1.20
1.30
1.40
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
4.00
5.00
7.00
10.00
12.00
15.00
20.00
30.00
40.00
0.05
7.170
3.669
1.916
1.331
1.037
0.860
0.501
0.378
0.315
0.249
0.214
0.176
0.149
0.137
0.126
0.113
0.099
0.091
0.06
8.604
4.402
2.299
1.597
1.244
1.032
0.602
0.454
0.378
0.299
0.257
0.212
0.178
0.165
0.151
0.136
0.119
0.110
0.07
10.038
5.136
2.683
1.863
1.451
1.204
0.702
0.530
0.441
0.349
0.300
0.247
0.208
0.192
0.176
0.159
0.139
0.128
0.08
11.472
5.870
3.066
2.129
1.659
1.376
0.802
0.606
0.504
0.398
0.342
0.282
0.238
0.220
0.201
0.181
0.159
0.146
0.09
12.906
6.604
3.449
2.395
1.866
1.547
0.903
0.681
0.567
0.448
0.385
0.317
0.267
0.247
0.226
0.204
0.179
0.165
0.10
14.340
7.337
3.832
2.661
2.073
1.719
1.003
0.757
0.630
0.498
0.428
0.353
0.297
0.275
0.252
0.227
0.199
0.183
0.11
15.774
8.071
4.216
2.927
2.281
1.891
1.103
0.833
0.693
0.548
0.471
0.388
0.327
0.302
0.277
0.249
0.219
0.201
0.12
17.208
8.805
4.599
3.193
2.488
2.063
1.203
0.908
0.756
0.598
0.514
0.423
0.356
0.330
0.302
0.272
0.239
0.219
0.13
18.642
9.539
4.982
3.459
2.695
2.235
1.304
0.984
0.819
0.647
0.556
0.459
0.386
0.357
0.327
0.295
0.259
0.238
0.14
20.076
10.272
5.365
3.725
2.903
2.407
1.404
1.060
0.882
0.697
0.599
0.494
0.416
0.385
0.352
0.317
0.278
0.256
0.15
21.510
11.006
5.749
3.992
3.110
2.579
1.504
1.135
0.945
0.747
0.642
0.529
0.446
0.412
0.377
0.340
0.298
0.274
0.16
22.944
11.740
6.132
4.258
3.317
2.751
1.605
1.211
1.008
0.797
0.685
0.564
0.475
0.440
0.402
0.363
0.318
0.293
0.17
24.378
12.474
6.515
4.524
3.525
2.923
1.705
1.287
1.071
0.847
0.728
0.600
0.505
0.467
0.428
0.385
0.338
0.311
0.18
25.812
13.207
6.898
4.790
3.732
3.095
1.805
1.363
1.134
0.896
0.770
0.635
0.535
0.495
0.453
0.408
0.358
0.329
0.19
27.246
13.941
7.282
5.056
3.939
3.267
1.906
1.438
1.197
0.946
0.813
0.670
0.564
0.522
0.478
0.431
0.378
0.347
0.20
28.680
14.675
7.665
5.322
4.147
3.439
2.006
1.514
1.260
0.996
0.856
0.706
0.594
0.550
0.503
0.453
0.398
0.366
0.25
35.850
18.344
9.581
6.653
5.184
4.299
2.507
1.892
1.575
1.245
1.070
0.882
0.743
0.687
0.629
0.567
0.497
0.457
0.30
43.021
22.012
11.497
7.983
6.220
5.158
3.009
2.271
1.891
1.494
1.284
1.058
0.891
0.824
0.755
0.680
0.597
0.549
0.35
50.191
25.681
13.413
9.314
7.257
6.018
3.510
2.649
2.206
1.743
1.498
1.235
1.040
0.962
0.880
0.794
0.696
0.640
0.40
57.361
29.350
15.329
10.644
8.294
6.878
4.012
3.028
2.521
1.992
1.712
1.411
1.188
1.099
1.006
0.907
0.796
0.731
0.45
64.531
33.018
17.246
11.975
9.330
7.737
4.513
3.406
2.836
2.241
1.926
1.587
1.337
1.236
1.132
1.020
0.895
0.823
0.50
71.701
36.687
19.162
13.305
10.367
8.597
5.015
3.785
3.151
2.490
2.140
1.764
1.485
1.374
1.258
1.134
0.994
0.914
0.55
78.871
40.356
21.078
14.636
11.404
9.457
5.516
4.163
3.466
2.739
2.354
1.940
1.634
1.511
1.384
1.247
1.094
1.006
0.60
86.041
44.025
22.994
15.966
12.441
10.317
6.017
4.542
3.781
2.988
2.568
2.117
1.782
1.649
1.509
1.360
1.193
1.097
0.65
93.211
47.693
24.910
17.297
13.477
11.176
6.519
4.920
4.096
3.237
2.782
2.293
1.931
1.786
1.635
1.474
1.293
1.188
0.70
100.381
51.362
26.827
18.627
14.514
12.036
7.020
5.299
4.411
3.486
2.996
2.469
2.079
1.923
1.761
1.587
1.392
1.280
0.75
107.551
55.031
28.743
19.958
15.551
12.896
7.522
5.677
4.726
3.735
3.210
2.646
2.228
2.061
1.887
1.701
1.492
1.371
0.80
114.721
58.700
30.659
21.288
16.587
13.755
8.023
6.056
5.042
3.984
3.424
2.822
2.376
2.198
2.012
1.814
1.591
1.463
0.85
121.891
62.368
32.575
22.619
17.624
14.615
8.525
6.434
5.357
4.233
3.638
2.999
2.525
2.335
2.138
1.927
1.691
1.554
0.90
129.062
66.037
34.491
23.949
18.661
15.475
9.026
6.813
5.672
4.482
3.852
3.175
2.674
2.473
2.264
2.041
1.790
1.646
0.95
136.232
69.706
36.408
25.280
19.697
16.335
9.528
7.191
5.987
4.731
4.066
3.351
2.822
2.610
2.390
2.154
1.889
1.737
1.00
143.402
73.374
38.324
26.611
20.734
17.194
10.029
7.570
6.302
4.980
4.280
3.528
2.971
2.748
2.516
2.267
1.989
1.828
1.05
150.572
77.043
40.240
27.941
21.771
18.054
10.530
7.948
6.617
5.229
4.494
3.704
3.119
2.885
2.641
2.381
2.088
1.920

PD300 User Manual
112
Inverse characteristic

PD300 User Manual
113
Long duration curve (IEC)

T := M
I 1
I
0
K = 120, = 1
tr = 120

M \ I/Io
1.05
1.10
1.20
1.30
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
5.00
10.00
20.00
40.00
0.05
120.000
60.000
30.000
20.000
12.000
6.000
4.000
3.000
1.500
0.667
0.316
0.154
0.06
144.000
72.000
36.000
24.000
14.400
7.200
4.800
3.600
1.800
0.800
0.379
0.185
0.07
168.000
84.000
42.000
28.000
16.800
8.400
5.600
4.200
2.100
0.933
0.442
0.215
0.08
192.000
96.000
48.000
32.000
19.200
9.600
6.400
4.800
2.400
1.067
0.505
0.246
0.09
216.000
108.000
54.000
36.000
21.600
10.800
7.200
5.400
2.700
1.200
0.568
0.277
0.10
240.000
120.000
60.000
40.000
24.000
12.000
8.000
6.000
3.000
1.333
0.632
0.308
0.11
264.000
132.000
66.000
44.000
26.400
13.200
8.800
6.600
3.300
1.467
0.695
0.338
0.12
288.000
144.000
72.000
48.000
28.800
14.400
9.600
7.200
3.600
1.600
0.758
0.369
0.13
312.000
156.000
78.000
52.000
31.200
15.600
10.400
7.800
3.900
1.733
0.821
0.400
0.14
336.000
168.000
84.000
56.000
33.600
16.800
11.200
8.400
4.200
1.867
0.884
0.431
0.15
360.000
180.000
90.000
60.000
36.000
18.000
12.000
9.000
4.500
2.000
0.947
0.462
0.16
384.000
192.000
96.000
64.000
38.400
19.200
12.800
9.600
4.800
2.133
1.011
0.492
0.17
408.000
204.000
102.000
68.000
40.800
20.400
13.600
10.200
5.100
2.267
1.074
0.523
0.18
432.000
216.000
108.000
72.000
43.200
21.600
14.400
10.800
5.400
2.400
1.137
0.554
0.19
456.000
228.000
114.000
76.000
45.600
22.800
15.200
11.400
5.700
2.533
1.200
0.585
0.20
480.001
240.000
120.000
80.000
48.000
24.000
16.000
12.000
6.000
2.667
1.263
0.615
0.25
600.001
300.000
150.000
100.000
60.000
30.000
20.000
15.000
7.500
3.333
1.579
0.769
0.30
720.001
360.000
180.000
120.000
72.000
36.000
24.000
18.000
9.000
4.000
1.895
0.923
0.35
840.001
420.000
210.000
140.000
84.000
42.000
28.000
21.000
10.500
4.667
2.211
1.077
0.40
960.001
480.000
240.000
160.000
96.000
48.000
32.000
24.000
12.000
5.333
2.526
1.231
0.45
1080.001
540.000
270.000
180.000
108.000
54.000
36.000
27.000
13.500
6.000
2.842
1.385
0.50
1200.001
600.000
300.000
200.000
120.000
60.000
40.000
30.000
15.000
6.667
3.158
1.538
0.55
1320.001
660.000
330.000
220.000
132.000
66.000
44.000
33.000
16.500
7.333
3.474
1.692
0.60
1440.002
720.000
360.000
240.000
144.000
72.000
48.000
36.000
18.000
8.000
3.789
1.846
0.65
1560.002
780.000
390.000
260.000
156.000
78.000
52.000
39.000
19.500
8.667
4.105
2.000
0.70
1680.002
840.000
420.000
280.000
168.000
84.000
56.000
42.000
21.000
9.333
4.421
2.154
0.75
1800.002
900.000
450.000
300.000
180.000
90.000
60.000
45.000
22.500
10.000
4.737
2.308
0.80
1920.002
960.000
480.000
320.000
192.000
96.000
64.000
48.000
24.000
10.667
5.053
2.462
0.85
2040.002
1020.000
510.000
340.000
204.000
102.000
68.000
51.000
25.500
11.333
5.368
2.615
0.90
2160.002
1080.000
540.000
360.000
216.000
108.000
72.000
54.000
27.000
12.000
5.684
2.769
0.95
2280.003
1140.000
570.000
380.000
228.000
114.000
76.000
57.000
28.500
12.667
6.000
2.923
1.00
2400.003
1200.000
600.000
400.000
240.000
120.000
80.000
60.000
30.000
13.333
6.316
3.077
1.05
2520.003
1260.000
630.000
420.000
252.000
126.000
84.000
63.000
31.500
14.000
6.632
3.231

PD300 User Manual
114
Long duration curve

PD300 User Manual
115
Short duration curve IEC
T := M
I
I 1
0
K = 0.05, = 0.04
tr = 0.5

M \ I/Io
1.05
1.10
1.20
1.30
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
5.00
10.00
20.00
40.00
0.05
1.280
0.655
0.342
0.237
0.153
0.089
0.067
0.056
0.038
0.026
0.020
0.016
0.06
1.536
0.785
0.410
0.284
0.183
0.107
0.080
0.067
0.045
0.031
0.024
0.019
0.07
1.792
0.916
0.478
0.332
0.214
0.124
0.094
0.078
0.053
0.036
0.027
0.022
0.08
2.048
1.047
0.546
0.379
0.245
0.142
0.107
0.089
0.060
0.041
0.031
0.025
0.09
2.304
1.178
0.615
0.427
0.275
0.160
0.121
0.100
0.068
0.047
0.035
0.028
0.10
2.559
1.309
0.683
0.474
0.306
0.178
0.134
0.111
0.075
0.052
0.039
0.031
0.11
2.815
1.440
0.751
0.521
0.336
0.196
0.147
0.122
0.083
0.057
0.043
0.035
0.12
3.071
1.571
0.820
0.569
0.367
0.213
0.161
0.134
0.090
0.062
0.047
0.038
0.13
3.327
1.702
0.888
0.616
0.398
0.231
0.174
0.145
0.098
0.067
0.051
0.041
0.14
3.583
1.833
0.956
0.664
0.428
0.249
0.188
0.156
0.105
0.073
0.055
0.044
0.15
3.839
1.964
1.025
0.711
0.459
0.267
0.201
0.167
0.113
0.078
0.059
0.047
0.16
4.095
2.094
1.093
0.758
0.489
0.285
0.214
0.178
0.120
0.083
0.063
0.050
0.17
4.351
2.225
1.161
0.806
0.520
0.302
0.228
0.189
0.128
0.088
0.067
0.053
0.18
4.607
2.356
1.230
0.853
0.550
0.320
0.241
0.200
0.135
0.093
0.071
0.057
0.19
4.863
2.487
1.298
0.900
0.581
0.338
0.254
0.211
0.143
0.098
0.075
0.060
0.20
5.119
2.618
1.366
0.948
0.612
0.356
0.268
0.223
0.150
0.104
0.079
0.063
0.25
6.399
3.273
1.708
1.185
0.764
0.445
0.335
0.278
0.188
0.130
0.098
0.079
0.30
7.678
3.927
2.049
1.422
0.917
0.534
0.402
0.334
0.226
0.155
0.118
0.094
0.35
8.958
4.582
2.391
1.659
1.070
0.622
0.469
0.390
0.263
0.181
0.137
0.110
0.40
10.238
5.236
2.732
1.896
1.223
0.711
0.536
0.445
0.301
0.207
0.157
0.126
0.45
11.518
5.891
3.074
2.133
1.376
0.800
0.603
0.501
0.338
0.233
0.177
0.142
0.50
12.797
6.545
3.416
2.370
1.529
0.889
0.670
0.556
0.376
0.259
0.196
0.157
0.55
14.077
7.200
3.757
2.607
1.682
0.978
0.737
0.612
0.414
0.285
0.216
0.173
0.60
15.357
7.854
4.099
2.844
1.835
1.067
0.804
0.668
0.451
0.311
0.236
0.189
0.65
16.637
8.509
4.440
3.081
1.988
1.156
0.871
0.723
0.489
0.337
0.255
0.204
0.70
17.916
9.163
4.782
3.318
2.141
1.245
0.938
0.779
0.526
0.363
0.275
0.220
0.75
19.196
9.818
5.123
3.555
2.293
1.334
1.005
0.835
0.564
0.389
0.295
0.236
0.80
20.476
10.472
5.465
3.792
2.446
1.423
1.071
0.890
0.602
0.415
0.314
0.252
0.85
21.756
11.127
5.806
4.029
2.599
1.512
1.138
0.946
0.639
0.441
0.334
0.267
0.90
23.035
11.781
6.148
4.265
2.752
1.601
1.205
1.002
0.677
0.466
0.353
0.283
0.95
24.315
12.436
6.489
4.502
2.905
1.690
1.272
1.057
0.714
0.492
0.373
0.299
1.00
25.595
13.090
6.831
4.739
3.058
1.778
1.339
1.113
0.752
0.518
0.393
0.314
1.05
26.875
13.745
7.173
4.976
3.211
1.867
1.406
1.169
0.790
0.544
0.412
0.330

PD300 User Manual
116
Short duration curve

PD300 User Manual
117

Very inverse curve
T = M * ( I / IoK) 1
=1
K = 13,5

M \ I/Io
1.05
1.10
1.20
1.30
1.40
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
4.00
5.00
7.00
10.00
12.00
15.00
20.00
30.00
40.00
0.05
13.500
6.750
3.375
2.250
1.688
1.350
0.675
0.450
0.338
0.225
0.169
0.113
0.075
0.061
0.048
0.036
0.023
0.017
0.06
16.200
8.100
4.050
2.700
2.025
1.620
0.810
0.540
0.405
0.270
0.203
0.135
0.090
0.074
0.058
0.043
0.028
0.021
0.07
18.900
9.450
4.725
3.150
2.363
1.890
0.945
0.630
0.472
0.315
0.236
0.157
0.105
0.086
0.068
0.050
0.033
0.024
0.08
21.600
10.800
5.400
3.600
2.700
2.160
1.080
0.720
0.540
0.360
0.270
0.180
0.120
0.098
0.077
0.057
0.037
0.028
0.09
24.300
12.150
6.075
4.050
3.038
2.430
1.215
0.810
0.607
0.405
0.304
0.202
0.135
0.110
0.087
0.064
0.042
0.031
0.10
27.000
13.500
6.750
4.500
3.375
2.700
1.350
0.900
0.675
0.450
0.337
0.225
0.150
0.123
0.096
0.071
0.047
0.035
0.11
29.700
14.850
7.425
4.950
3.712
2.970
1.485
0.990
0.742
0.495
0.371
0.247
0.165
0.135
0.106
0.078
0.051
0.038
0.12
32.400
16.200
8.100
5.400
4.050
3.240
1.620
1.080
0.810
0.540
0.405
0.270
0.180
0.147
0.116
0.085
0.056
0.042
0.13
35.100
17.550
8.775
5.850
4.388
3.510
1.755
1.170
0.877
0.585
0.439
0.292
0.195
0.160
0.125
0.092
0.061
0.045
0.14
37.800
18.900
9.450
6.300
4.725
3.780
1.890
1.260
0.945
0.630
0.472
0.315
0.210
0.172
0.135
0.099
0.065
0.048
0.15
40.500
20.250
10.125
6.750
5.063
4.050
2.025
1.350
1.013
0.675
0.506
0.338
0.225
0.184
0.145
0.107
0.070
0.052
0.16
43.200
21.600
10.800
7.200
5.400
4.320
2.160
1.440
1.080
0.720
0.540
0.360
0.240
0.196
0.154
0.114
0.074
0.055
0.17
45.900
22.950
11.475
7.650
5.738
4.590
2.295
1.530
1.148
0.765
0.574
0.383
0.255
0.209
0.164
0.121
0.079
0.059
0.18
48.600
24.300
12.150
8.100
6.075
4.860
2.430
1.620
1.215
0.810
0.608
0.405
0.270
0.221
0.174
0.128
0.084
0.062
0.19
51.300
25.650
12.825
8.550
6.413
5.130
2.565
1.710
1.283
0.855
0.641
0.428
0.285
0.233
0.183
0.135
0.088
0.066
0.20
54.000
27.000
13.500
9.000
6.750
5.400
2.700
1.800
1.350
0.900
0.675
0.450
0.300
0.245
0.193
0.142
0.093
0.069
0.25
67.500
33.750
16.875
11.250
8.438
6.750
3.375
2.250
1.688
1.125
0.844
0.563
0.375
0.307
0.241
0.178
0.116
0.087
0.30
81.000
40.500
20.250
13.500
10.125
8.100
4.050
2.700
2.025
1.350
1.013
0.675
0.450
0.368
0.289
0.213
0.140
0.104
0.35
94.500
47.250
23.625
15.750
11.813
9.450
4.725
3.150
2.363
1.575
1.181
0.788
0.525
0.430
0.338
0.249
0.163
0.121
0.40
108.000
54.000
27.000
18.000
13.500
10.800
5.400
3.600
2.700
1.800
1.350
0.900
0.600
0.491
0.386
0.284
0.186
0.138
0.45
121.500
60.750
30.375
20.250
15.188
12.150
6.075
4.050
3.038
2.025
1.519
1.013
0.675
0.552
0.434
0.320
0.209
0.156
0.50
135.000
67.500
33.750
22.500
16.875
13.500
6.750
4.500
3.375
2.250
1.688
1.125
0.750
0.614
0.482
0.355
0.233
0.173
0.55
148.500
74.250
37.125
24.750
18.563
14.850
7.425
4.950
3.713
2.475
1.856
1.238
0.825
0.675
0.530
0.391
0.256
0.190
0.60
162.000
81.000
40.500
27.000
20.250
16.200
8.100
5.400
4.050
2.700
2.025
1.350
0.900
0.736
0.579
0.426
0.279
0.208
0.65
175.500
87.750
43.875
29.250
21.938
17.550
8.775
5.850
4.388
2.925
2.194
1.463
0.975
0.798
0.627
0.462
0.303
0.225
0.70
189.000
94.500
47.250
31.500
23.625
18.900
9.450
6.300
4.725
3.150
2.363
1.575
1.050
0.859
0.675
0.497
0.326
0.242
0.75
202.500
101.250
50.625
33.750
25.313
20.250
10.125
6.750
5.063
3.375
2.531
1.688
1.125
0.920
0.723
0.533
0.349
0.260
0.80
216.000
108.000
54.000
36.000
27.000
21.600
10.800
7.200
5.400
3.600
2.700
1.800
1.200
0.982
0.771
0.568
0.372
0.277
0.85
229.500
114.750
57.375
38.250
28.688
22.950
11.475
7.650
5.738
3.825
2.869
1.913
1.275
1.043
0.820
0.604
0.396
0.294
0.90
243.000
121.500
60.750
40.500
30.375
24.300
12.150
8.100
6.075
4.050
3.038
2.025
1.350
1.105
0.868
0.639
0.419
0.312
0.95
256.500
128.250
64.125
42.750
32.063
25.650
12.825
8.550
6.413
4.275
3.206
2.138
1.425
1.166
0.916
0.675
0.442
0.329
1.00
270.000
135.000
67.500
45.000
33.750
27.000
13.500
9.000
6.750
4.500
3.375
2.250
1.500
1.227
0.964
0.711
0.466
0.346
1.05
283.500
141.750
70.875
47.250
35.438
28.350
14.175
9.450
7.088
4.725
3.544
2.363
1.575
1.289
1.013
0.746
0.489
0.363

PD300 User Manual
118
Very inverse characteristic

PD300 User Manual
119
Extremely inverse curve
T = M * ( I / IoK) 1
=2
K = 80

M \ I/Io
1.05
1.10
1.20
1.30
1.40
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
4.00
5.00
7.00
10.00
12.00
15.00
20.00
30.00
40.00
0.05
39.024
19.048
9.091
5.797
4.167
3.200
1.333
0.762
0.500
0.267
0.167
0.083
0.040
0.028
0.018
0.010
0.004
0.003
0.06
46.829
22.857
10.909
6.957
5.000
3.840
1.600
0.914
0.600
0.320
0.200
0.100
0.048
0.034
0.021
0.012
0.005
0.003
0.07
54.634
26.667
12.727
8.116
5.833
4.480
1.867
1.067
0.700
0.373
0.233
0.117
0.057
0.039
0.025
0.014
0.006
0.004
0.08
62.439
30.476
14.545
9.275
6.667
5.120
2.133
1.219
0.800
0.427
0.267
0.133
0.065
0.045
0.029
0.016
0.007
0.004
0.09
70.244
34.286
16.364
10.435
7.500
5.760
2.400
1.371
0.900
0.480
0.300
0.150
0.073
0.050
0.032
0.018
0.008
0.005
0.10
78.049
38.095
18.182
11.594
8.333
6.400
2.667
1.524
1.000
0.533
0.333
0.167
0.081
0.056
0.036
0.020
0.009
0.005
0.11
85.854
41.905
20.000
12.754
9.167
7.040
2.933
1.676
1.100
0.587
0.367
0.183
0.089
0.062
0.039
0.022
0.010
0.006
0.12
93.659
45.714
21.818
13.913
10.000
7.680
3.200
1.829
1.200
0.640
0.400
0.200
0.097
0.067
0.043
0.024
0.011
0.006
0.13
101.464
49.524
23.636
15.072
10.833
8.320
3.467
1.981
1.300
0.693
0.433
0.217
0.105
0.073
0.046
0.026
0.012
0.007
0.14
109.268
53.333
25.455
16.232
11.667
8.960
3.733
2.133
1.400
0.747
0.467
0.233
0.113
0.078
0.050
0.028
0.012
0.007
0.15
117.073
57.143
27.273
17.391
12.500
9.600
4.000
2.286
1.500
0.800
0.500
0.250
0.121
0.084
0.054
0.030
0.013
0.008
0.16
124.878
60.952
29.091
18.551
13.333
10.240
4.267
2.438
1.600
0.853
0.533
0.267
0.129
0.090
0.057
0.032
0.014
0.008
0.17
132.683
64.762
30.909
19.710
14.167
10.880
4.533
2.590
1.700
0.907
0.567
0.283
0.137
0.095
0.061
0.034
0.015
0.009
0.18
140.488
68.571
32.727
20.870
15.000
11.520
4.800
2.743
1.800
0.960
0.600
0.300
0.145
0.101
0.064
0.036
0.016
0.009
0.19
148.293
72.381
34.545
22.029
15.833
12.160
5.067
2.895
1.900
1.013
0.633
0.317
0.154
0.106
0.068
0.038
0.017
0.010
0.20
156.098
76.190
36.364
23.188
16.667
12.800
5.333
3.048
2.000
1.067
0.667
0.333
0.162
0.112
0.071
0.040
0.018
0.010
0.25
195.122
95.238
45.455
28.986
20.833
16.000
6.667
3.810
2.500
1.333
0.833
0.417
0.202
0.140
0.089
0.050
0.022
0.013
0.30
234.147
114.286
54.545
34.783
25.000
19.200
8.000
4.571
3.000
1.600
1.000
0.500
0.242
0.168
0.107
0.060
0.027
0.015
0.35
273.171
133.333
63.636
40.580
29.167
22.400
9.333
5.333
3.500
1.867
1.167
0.583
0.283
0.196
0.125
0.070
0.031
0.018
0.40
312.195
152.381
72.727
46.377
33.333
25.600
10.667
6.095
4.000
2.133
1.333
0.667
0.323
0.224
0.143
0.080
0.036
0.020
0.45
351.220
171.429
81.818
52.174
37.500
28.800
12.000
6.857
4.500
2.400
1.500
0.750
0.364
0.252
0.161
0.090
0.040
0.023
0.50
390.244
190.476
90.909
57.971
41.667
32.000
13.333
7.619
5.000
2.667
1.667
0.833
0.404
0.280
0.179
0.100
0.044
0.025
0.55
429.269
209.524
100.000
63.768
45.833
35.200
14.667
8.381
5.500
2.933
1.833
0.917
0.444
0.308
0.196
0.110
0.049
0.028
0.60
468.293
228.571
109.091
69.565
50.000
38.400
16.000
9.143
6.000
3.200
2.000
1.000
0.485
0.336
0.214
0.120
0.053
0.030
0.65
507.318
247.619
118.182
75.362
54.167
41.600
17.333
9.905
6.500
3.467
2.167
1.083
0.525
0.364
0.232
0.130
0.058
0.033
0.70
546.342
266.667
127.273
81.159
58.333
44.800
18.667
10.667
7.000
3.733
2.333
1.167
0.566
0.392
0.250
0.140
0.062
0.035
0.75
585.367
285.714
136.364
86.957
62.500
48.000
20.000
11.429
7.500
4.000
2.500
1.250
0.606
0.420
0.268
0.150
0.067
0.038
0.80
624.391
304.762
145.455
92.754
66.667
51.200
21.333
12.190
8.000
4.267
2.667
1.333
0.646
0.448
0.286
0.160
0.071
0.040
0.85
663.415
323.810
154.545
98.551
70.833
54.400
22.667
12.952
8.500
4.533
2.833
1.417
0.687
0.476
0.304
0.170
0.076
0.043
0.90
702.440
342.857
163.636
104.348
75.000
57.600
24.000
13.714
9.000
4.800
3.000
1.500
0.727
0.503
0.321
0.180
0.080
0.045
0.95
741.464
361.905
172.727
110.145
79.167
60.800
25.333
14.476
9.500
5.067
3.167
1.583
0.768
0.531
0.339
0.190
0.085
0.048
1.00
780.489
380.952
181.818
115.942
83.333
64.000
26.667
15.238
10.000
5.333
3.333
1.667
0.808
0.559
0.357
0.201
0.089
0.050
1.05
819.513
400.000
190.909
121.739
87.500
67.200
28.000
16.000
10.500
5.600
3.500
1.750
0.848
0.587
0.375
0.211
0.093
0.053

PD300 User Manual
120
Extremely inverse characteristic

PD300 User Manual
121
Very inverse special curve

k
T := M
I 1
I
0
=1
K = 2,6

M \ I/Io
1.05
1.10
1.20
1.30
1.40
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
4.00
5.00
7.00
10.00
12.00
15.00
20.00
30.00
40.00
0.05
2.600
1.300
0.650
0.433
0.325
0.260
0.130
0.087
0.065
0.043
0.032
0.022
0.014
0.012
0.009
0.007
0.004
0.003
0.06
3.120
1.560
0.780
0.520
0.390
0.312
0.156
0.104
0.078
0.052
0.039
0.026
0.017
0.014
0.011
0.008
0.005
0.004
0.07
3.640
1.820
0.910
0.607
0.455
0.364
0.182
0.121
0.091
0.061
0.045
0.030
0.020
0.017
0.013
0.010
0.006
0.005
0.08
4.160
2.080
1.040
0.693
0.520
0.416
0.208
0.139
0.104
0.069
0.052
0.035
0.023
0.019
0.015
0.011
0.007
0.005
0.09
4.680
2.340
1.170
0.780
0.585
0.468
0.234
0.156
0.117
0.078
0.058
0.039
0.026
0.021
0.017
0.012
0.008
0.006
0.10
5.200
2.600
1.300
0.867
0.650
0.520
0.260
0.173
0.130
0.087
0.065
0.043
0.029
0.024
0.019
0.014
0.009
0.007
0.11
5.720
2.860
1.430
0.953
0.715
0.572
0.286
0.191
0.143
0.095
0.071
0.048
0.032
0.026
0.020
0.015
0.010
0.007
0.12
6.240
3.120
1.560
1.040
0.780
0.624
0.312
0.208
0.156
0.104
0.078
0.052
0.035
0.028
0.022
0.016
0.011
0.008
0.13
6.760
3.380
1.690
1.127
0.845
0.676
0.338
0.225
0.169
0.113
0.084
0.056
0.038
0.031
0.024
0.018
0.012
0.009
0.14
7.280
3.640
1.820
1.213
0.910
0.728
0.364
0.243
0.182
0.121
0.091
0.061
0.040
0.033
0.026
0.019
0.013
0.009
0.15
7.800
3.900
1.950
1.300
0.975
0.780
0.390
0.260
0.195
0.130
0.098
0.065
0.043
0.035
0.028
0.021
0.013
0.010
0.16
8.320
4.160
2.080
1.387
1.040
0.832
0.416
0.277
0.208
0.139
0.104
0.069
0.046
0.038
0.030
0.022
0.014
0.011
0.17
8.840
4.420
2.210
1.473
1.105
0.884
0.442
0.295
0.221
0.147
0.111
0.074
0.049
0.040
0.032
0.023
0.015
0.011
0.18
9.360
4.680
2.340
1.560
1.170
0.936
0.468
0.312
0.234
0.156
0.117
0.078
0.052
0.043
0.033
0.025
0.016
0.012
0.19
9.880
4.940
2.470
1.647
1.235
0.988
0.494
0.329
0.247
0.165
0.124
0.082
0.055
0.045
0.035
0.026
0.017
0.013
0.20
10.400
5.200
2.600
1.733
1.300
1.040
0.520
0.347
0.260
0.173
0.130
0.087
0.058
0.047
0.037
0.027
0.018
0.013
0.25
13.000
6.500
3.250
2.167
1.625
1.300
0.650
0.433
0.325
0.217
0.163
0.108
0.072
0.059
0.046
0.034
0.022
0.017
0.30
15.600
7.800
3.900
2.600
1.950
1.560
0.780
0.520
0.390
0.260
0.195
0.130
0.087
0.071
0.056
0.041
0.027
0.020
0.35
18.200
9.100
4.550
3.033
2.275
1.820
0.910
0.607
0.455
0.303
0.228
0.152
0.101
0.083
0.065
0.048
0.031
0.023
0.40
20.800
10.400
5.200
3.467
2.600
2.080
1.040
0.693
0.520
0.347
0.260
0.173
0.116
0.095
0.074
0.055
0.036
0.027
0.45
23.400
11.700
5.850
3.900
2.925
2.340
1.170
0.780
0.585
0.390
0.293
0.195
0.130
0.106
0.084
0.062
0.040
0.030
0.50
26.000
13.000
6.500
4.333
3.250
2.600
1.300
0.867
0.650
0.433
0.325
0.217
0.144
0.118
0.093
0.068
0.045
0.033
0.55
28.600
14.300
7.150
4.767
3.575
2.860
1.430
0.953
0.715
0.477
0.358
0.238
0.159
0.130
0.102
0.075
0.049
0.037
0.60
31.200
15.600
7.800
5.200
3.900
3.120
1.560
1.040
0.780
0.520
0.390
0.260
0.173
0.142
0.111
0.082
0.054
0.040
0.65
33.800
16.900
8.450
5.633
4.225
3.380
1.690
1.127
0.845
0.563
0.423
0.282
0.188
0.154
0.121
0.089
0.058
0.043
0.70
36.400
18.200
9.100
6.067
4.550
3.640
1.820
1.213
0.910
0.607
0.455
0.303
0.202
0.165
0.130
0.096
0.063
0.047
0.75
39.000
19.500
9.750
6.500
4.875
3.900
1.950
1.300
0.975
0.650
0.488
0.325
0.217
0.177
0.139
0.103
0.067
0.050
0.80
41.600
20.800
10.400
6.933
5.200
4.160
2.080
1.387
1.040
0.693
0.520
0.347
0.231
0.189
0.149
0.109
0.072
0.053
0.85
44.200
22.100
11.050
7.367
5.525
4.420
2.210
1.473
1.105
0.737
0.553
0.368
0.246
0.201
0.158
0.116
0.076
0.057
0.90
46.800
23.400
11.700
7.800
5.850
4.680
2.340
1.560
1.170
0.780
0.585
0.390
0.260
0.213
0.167
0.123
0.081
0.060
0.95
49.400
24.700
12.350
8.233
6.175
4.940
2.470
1.647
1.235
0.823
0.618
0.412
0.274
0.225
0.176
0.130
0.085
0.063
1.00
52.000
26.000
13.000
8.667
6.500
5.200
2.600
1.733
1.300
0.867
0.650
0.433
0.289
0.236
0.186
0.137
0.090
0.067
1.05
54.600
27.300
13.650
9.100
6.825
5.460
2.730
1.820
1.365
0.910
0.683
0.455
0.303
0.248
0.195
0.144
0.094
0.070

PD300 User Manual
122
Very inverse special characteristic

PD300 User Manual
123
IV.2. ANSI CURVES

Enclosed below are the groups of curves, according to ANSI, which correspond to the following types:
Normal Inverse characteristic
Very Inverse characteristic
Extremely Inverse characteristic
Moderately Inverse characteristic
These curves comply to the general formula
where:
T : Trip time (sec)
M : multiplier ("time index"). Valid range from 0.5 to 30.0 in 0.1 steps
I: Measured current
Io: Pickup current setting
A,B,C,D,E, constants that depend upon the type of curve:
Constants
A
B
C
D
E
Inverse charact.
0.0274
2.2614
0.3000
-4.1899
9.1272
Very inverse
0.0615
0.7989
0.3400
-0.2840
4.0505
Extrem. inverse
0.0399
0.2294
0.5000
3.0094
0.7222
Moderat. inverse
0.1735
0.6791
0.8000
-0.0800
0.1271
The following represent the curves, which correspond to indexes 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0, 15.0, 20.0 and
30.0. for each type of characteristic. Bear in mind that there are another 9 curves between each two curves with a difference
of 1.0.

PD300 User Manual
124
Normal inverse curve
A = 0.0274
B = 2.2614
C = 0.3000
D = -4.1899
E = 9.1272

M \ I/Io
1.05
1.10
1.20
1.30
1.40
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
4.00
5.00
7.00
10.00
12.00
15.00
20.00
30.00
40.00
0.5
8.614
7.067
4.944
3.613
2.739
2.142
0.883
0.523
0.377
0.256
0.203
0.151
0.113
0.098
0.082
0.066
0.050
0.041
1.0
17.229
14.134
9.888
7.226
5.478
4.284
1.766
1.047
0.754
0.513
0.407
0.302
0.226
0.196
0.165
0.133
0.099
0.082
2.0
34.457
28.268
19.775
14.452
10.956
8.568
3.531
2.094
1.508
1.025
0.814
0.604
0.452
0.392
0.329
0.265
0.198
0.164
3.0
51.686
42.402
29.663
21.678
16.434
12.853
5.297
3.140
2.262
1.538
1.220
0.906
0.678
0.587
0.494
0.398
0.297
0.246
4.0
68.915
56.536
39.550
28.904
21.912
17.137
7.062
4.187
3.016
2.051
1.627
1.208
0.904
0.783
0.659
0.530
0.397
0.327
5.0
86.144
70.670
49.438
36.131
27.389
21.421
8.828
5.234
3.770
2.564
2.034
1.510
1.130
0.979
0.824
0.663
0.496
0.409
6.0
103.372
84.804
59.325
43.357
32.867
25.705
10.594
6.281
4.524
3.076
2.441
1.812
1.356
1.175
0.988
0.796
0.595
0.491
7.0
120.601
98.938
69.213
50.583
38.345
29.989
12.359
7.328
5.277
3.589
2.848
2.114
1.582
1.370
1.153
0.928
0.694
0.573
8.0
137.830
113.072
79.100
57.809
43.823
34.274
14.125
8.374
6.031
4.102
3.254
2.415
1.808
1.566
1.318
1.061
0.793
0.655
9.0
155.059
127.206
88.988
65.035
49.301
38.558
15.890
9.421
6.785
4.615
3.661
2.717
2.034
1.762
1.482
1.193
0.892
0.737
10.0
172.287
141.340
98.875
72.261
54.779
42.842
17.656
10.468
7.539
5.127
4.068
3.019
2.260
1.958
1.647
1.326
0.991
0.818
11.0
189.516
155.474
108.763
79.487
60.257
47.126
19.422
11.515
8.293
5.640
4.475
3.321
2.486
2.154
1.812
1.458
1.091
0.900
12.0
206.745
169.608
118.650
86.713
65.735
51.410
21.187
12.562
9.047
6.153
4.881
3.623
2.712
2.349
1.977
1.591
1.190
0.982
13.0
223.974
183.742
128.538
93.939
71.213
55.694
22.953
13.608
9.801
6.665
5.288
3.925
2.938
2.545
2.141
1.724
1.289
1.064
14.0
241.202
197.876
138.425
101.165
76.690
59.979
24.719
14.655
10.555
7.178
5.695
4.227
3.164
2.741
2.306
1.856
1.388
1.146
15.0
258.431
212.010
148.313
108.392
82.168
64.263
26.484
15.702
11.309
7.691
6.102
4.529
3.390
2.937
2.471
1.989
1.487
1.228
16.0
275.660
226.144
158.200
115.618
87.646
68.547
28.250
16.749
12.063
8.204
6.509
4.831
3.616
3.132
2.636
2.121
1.586
1.310
17.0
292.889
240.278
168.088
122.844
93.124
72.831
30.015
17.796
12.817
8.716
6.915
5.133
3.842
3.328
2.800
2.254
1.685
1.391
18.0
310.117
254.412
177.975
130.070
98.602
77.115
31.781
18.842
13.571
9.229
7.322
5.435
4.068
3.524
2.965
2.387
1.785
1.473
19.0
327.346
268.546
187.863
137.296
104.080
81.400
33.547
19.889
14.324
9.742
7.729
5.737
4.294
3.720
3.130
2.519
1.884
1.555
20.0
344.575
282.680
197.750
144.522
109.558
85.684
35.312
20.936
15.078
10.254
8.136
6.039
4.520
3.915
3.294
2.652
1.983
1.637
21.0
361.803
296.814
207.638
151.748
115.036
89.968
37.078
21.983
15.832
10.767
8.543
6.341
4.746
4.111
3.459
2.784
2.082
1.719
22.0
379.032
310.948
217.525
158.974
120.514
94.252
38.843
23.030
16.586
11.280
8.949
6.643
4.972
4.307
3.624
2.917
2.181
1.801
23.0
396.261
325.082
227.413
166.200
125.992
98.536
40.609
24.076
17.340
11.793
9.356
6.944
5.198
4.503
3.789
3.050
2.280
1.883
24.0
413.490
339.216
237.300
173.426
131.469
102.821
42.375
25.123
18.094
12.305
9.763
7.246
5.424
4.699
3.953
3.182
2.379
1.964
25.0
430.718
353.350
247.188
180.653
136.947
107.105
44.140
26.170
18.848
12.818
10.170
7.548
5.650
4.894
4.118
3.315
2.478
2.046
26.0
447.947
367.484
257.075
187.879
142.425
111.389
45.906
27.217
19.602
13.331
10.576
7.850
5.876
5.090
4.283
3.447
2.578
2.128
27.0
465.176
381.618
266.963
195.105
147.903
115.673
47.671
28.264
20.356
13.844
10.983
8.152
6.102
5.286
4.447
3.580
2.677
2.210
28.0
482.405
395.752
276.850
202.331
153.381
119.957
49.437
29.310
21.110
14.356
11.390
8.454
6.328
5.482
4.612
3.713
2.776
2.292
29.0
499.633
409.886
286.738
209.557
158.859
124.242
51.203
30.357
21.864
14.869
11.797
8.756
6.554
5.677
4.777
3.845
2.875
2.374
30.0
516.862
424.020
296.625
216.783
164.337
128.526
52.968
31.404
22.618
15.382
12.204
9.058
6.780
5.873
4.942
3.978
2.974
2.455

PD300 User Manual
125
Inverse characteristic

PD300 User Manual
126
Very inverse curve
A = 0.0615
B = 0.7989
C = 0.3400
D = -0.2840
E = 4.0505

M \ I/Io
1.05
1.10
1.20
1.30
1.40
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
4.00
5.00
7.00
10.00
12.00
15.00
20.00
30.00
40.00
0.5
5.970
4.924
3.487
2.582
1.982
1.567
0.663
0.386
0.268
0.171
0.130
0.094
0.073
0.065
0.058
0.051
0.044
0.041
1.0
11.940
9.848
6.975
5.164
3.963
3.134
1.325
0.772
0.537
0.341
0.260
0.189
0.146
0.130
0.116
0.102
0.088
0.082
2.0
23.881
19.696
13.949
10.327
7.927
6.268
2.650
1.545
1.074
0.682
0.520
0.378
0.291
0.261
0.232
0.204
0.177
0.163
3.0
35.821
29.544
20.924
15.491
11.890
9.402
3.976
2.317
1.611
1.024
0.780
0.566
0.437
0.391
0.348
0.306
0.265
0.245
4.0
47.762
39.393
27.898
20.655
15.853
12.537
5.301
3.090
2.148
1.365
1.040
0.755
0.583
0.522
0.464
0.408
0.353
0.326
5.0
59.702
49.241
34.873
25.819
19.816
15.671
6.626
3.862
2.685
1.706
1.299
0.944
0.728
0.652
0.580
0.510
0.441
0.408
6.0
71.642
59.089
41.848
30.982
23.780
18.805
7.951
4.635
3.221
2.047
1.559
1.133
0.874
0.783
0.696
0.612
0.530
0.489
7.0
83.583
68.937
48.822
36.146
27.743
21.939
9.276
5.407
3.758
2.388
1.819
1.321
1.020
0.913
0.812
0.714
0.618
0.571
8.0
95.523
78.785
55.797
41.310
31.706
25.073
10.602
6.179
4.295
2.730
2.079
1.510
1.165
1.044
0.928
0.815
0.706
0.652
9.0
107.464
88.633
62.771
46.474
35.670
28.207
11.927
6.952
4.832
3.071
2.339
1.699
1.311
1.174
1.044
0.917
0.794
0.734
10.0
119.404
98.481
69.746
51.637
39.633
31.341
13.252
7.724
5.369
3.412
2.599
1.888
1.457
1.305
1.160
1.019
0.883
0.815
11.0
131.344
108.330
76.721
56.801
43.596
34.475
14.577
8.497
5.906
3.753
2.859
2.076
1.602
1.435
1.276
1.121
0.971
0.897
12.0
143.285
118.178
83.695
61.965
47.560
37.610
15.902
9.269
6.443
4.094
3.119
2.265
1.748
1.566
1.392
1.223
1.059
0.978
13.0
155.225
128.026
90.670
67.128
51.523
40.744
17.228
10.041
6.980
4.436
3.379
2.454
1.893
1.696
1.507
1.325
1.147
1.060
14.0
167.165
137.874
97.645
72.292
55.486
43.878
18.553
10.814
7.517
4.777
3.638
2.643
2.039
1.827
1.623
1.427
1.236
1.141
15.0
179.106
147.722
104.619
77.456
59.449
47.012
19.878
11.586
8.054
5.118
3.898
2.831
2.185
1.957
1.739
1.529
1.324
1.223
16.0
191.046
157.570
111.594
82.620
63.413
50.146
21.203
12.359
8.591
5.459
4.158
3.020
2.330
2.088
1.855
1.631
1.412
1.304
17.0
202.987
167.419
118.568
87.783
67.376
53.280
22.528
13.131
9.127
5.800
4.418
3.209
2.476
2.218
1.971
1.733
1.501
1.386
18.0
214.927
177.267
125.543
92.947
71.339
56.414
23.853
13.904
9.664
6.141
4.678
3.398
2.622
2.349
2.087
1.835
1.589
1.468
19.0
226.867
187.115
132.518
98.111
75.303
59.549
25.179
14.676
10.201
6.483
4.938
3.587
2.767
2.479
2.203
1.937
1.677
1.549
20.0
238.808
196.963
139.492
103.275
79.266
62.683
26.504
15.448
10.738
6.824
5.198
3.775
2.913
2.610
2.319
2.039
1.765
1.631
21.0
250.748
206.811
146.467
108.438
83.229
65.817
27.829
16.221
11.275
7.165
5.458
3.964
3.059
2.740
2.435
2.141
1.854
1.712
22.0
262.689
216.659
153.441
113.602
87.193
68.951
29.154
16.993
11.812
7.506
5.718
4.153
3.204
2.871
2.551
2.243
1.942
1.794
23.0
274.629
226.507
160.416
118.766
91.156
72.085
30.479
17.766
12.349
7.847
5.977
4.342
3.350
3.001
2.667
2.344
2.030
1.875
24.0
286.569
236.356
167.391
123.930
95.119
75.219
31.805
18.538
12.886
8.189
6.237
4.530
3.496
3.132
2.783
2.446
2.118
1.957
25.0
298.510
246.204
174.365
129.093
99.082
78.353
33.130
19.310
13.423
8.530
6.497
4.719
3.641
3.262
2.899
2.548
2.207
2.038
26.0
310.450
256.052
181.340
134.257
103.046
81.487
34.455
20.083
13.960
8.871
6.757
4.908
3.787
3.393
3.015
2.650
2.295
2.120
27.0
322.391
265.900
188.314
139.421
107.009
84.622
35.780
20.855
14.497
9.212
7.017
5.097
3.933
3.523
3.131
2.752
2.383
2.201
28.0
334.331
275.748
195.289
144.584
110.972
87.756
37.105
21.628
15.034
9.553
7.277
5.285
4.078
3.654
3.247
2.854
2.471
2.283
29.0
346.271
285.596
202.264
149.748
114.936
90.890
38.431
22.400
15.570
9.895
7.537
5.474
4.224
3.784
3.363
2.956
2.560
2.364
30.0
358.212
295.444
209.238
154.912
118.899
94.024
39.756
23.173
16.107
10.236
7.797
5.663
4.370
3.914
3.479
3.058
2.648
2.446

PD300 User Manual
127
Very inverse characteristic

PD300 User Manual
128
Extremely inverse curve
A = 0.0399
B = 2.2294
C = 0.5000
D = 3.0094
E = 0.7222

M \ I/Io
1.05
1.10
1.20
1.30
1.40
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
4.00
5.00
7.00
10.00
12.00
15.00
20.00
30.00
40.00
0.5
7.373
6.063
4.307
3.220
2.500
2.000
0.872
0.499
0.330
0.184
0.124
0.075
0.049
0.042
0.035
0.030
0.026
0.024
1.0
14.746
12.125
8.615
6.439
5.001
4.001
1.744
0.997
0.659
0.368
0.247
0.149
0.098
0.083
0.070
0.060
0.051
0.048
2.0
29.492
24.250
17.230
12.879
10.002
8.002
3.489
1.994
1.319
0.736
0.495
0.298
0.196
0.166
0.141
0.119
0.102
0.095
3.0
44.239
36.376
25.844
19.318
15.002
12.003
5.233
2.992
1.978
1.104
0.742
0.447
0.295
0.249
0.211
0.179
0.153
0.143
4.0
58.985
48.501
34.459
25.758
20.003
16.004
6.977
3.989
2.638
1.472
0.990
0.596
0.393
0.332
0.281
0.239
0.205
0.191
5.0
73.731
60.626
43.074
32.197
25.004
20.004
8.722
4.986
3.297
1.840
1.237
0.745
0.491
0.415
0.351
0.298
0.256
0.238
6.0
88.477
72.751
51.689
38.636
30.005
24.005
10.466
5.983
3.956
2.208
1.484
0.894
0.589
0.498
0.422
0.358
0.307
0.286
7.0
103.224
84.876
60.303
45.076
35.005
28.006
12.210
6.981
4.616
2.576
1.732
1.043
0.688
0.582
0.492
0.418
0.358
0.334
8.0
117.970
97.002
68.918
51.515
40.006
32.007
13.955
7.978
5.275
2.944
1.979
1.192
0.786
0.665
0.562
0.477
0.409
0.381
9.0
132.716
109.127
77.533
57.954
45.007
36.008
15.699
8.975
5.934
3.312
2.227
1.341
0.884
0.748
0.632
0.537
0.460
0.429
10.0
147.462
121.252
86.148
64.394
50.008
40.009
17.443
9.972
6.594
3.680
2.474
1.491
0.982
0.831
0.703
0.597
0.512
0.476
11.0
162.208
133.377
94.763
70.833
55.008
44.010
19.188
10.969
7.253
4.047
2.722
1.640
1.081
0.914
0.773
0.656
0.563
0.524
12.0
176.955
145.502
103.377
77.273
60.009
48.011
20.932
11.967
7.913
4.415
2.969
1.789
1.179
0.997
0.843
0.716
0.614
0.572
13.0
191.701
157.628
111.992
83.712
65.010
52.012
22.676
12.964
8.572
4.783
3.216
1.938
1.277
1.080
0.914
0.776
0.665
0.619
14.0
206.447
169.753
120.607
90.151
70.011
56.013
24.421
13.961
9.231
5.151
3.464
2.087
1.375
1.163
0.984
0.835
0.716
0.667
15.0
221.193
181.878
129.222
96.591
75.012
60.013
26.165
14.958
9.891
5.519
3.711
2.236
1.474
1.246
1.054
0.895
0.767
0.715
16.0
235.940
194.003
137.837
103.030
80.012
64.014
27.909
15.956
10.550
5.887
3.959
2.385
1.572
1.329
1.124
0.955
0.819
0.762
17.0
250.686
206.128
146.451
109.470
85.013
68.015
29.654
16.953
11.210
6.255
4.206
2.534
1.670
1.412
1.195
1.014
0.870
0.810
18.0
265.432
218.254
155.066
115.909
90.014
72.016
31.398
17.950
11.869
6.623
4.453
2.683
1.768
1.495
1.265
1.074
0.921
0.858
19.0
280.178
230.379
163.681
122.348
95.015
76.017
33.142
18.947
12.528
6.991
4.701
2.832
1.866
1.578
1.335
1.134
0.972
0.905
20.0
294.924
242.504
172.296
128.788
100.015
80.018
34.887
19.944
13.188
7.359
4.948
2.981
1.965
1.662
1.405
1.194
1.023
0.953
21.0
309.671
254.629
180.910
135.227
105.016
84.019
36.631
20.942
13.847
7.727
5.196
3.130
2.063
1.745
1.476
1.253
1.074
1.001
22.0
324.417
266.754
189.525
141.666
110.017
88.020
38.375
21.939
14.506
8.095
5.443
3.279
2.161
1.828
1.546
1.313
1.126
1.048
23.0
339.163
278.879
198.140
148.106
115.018
92.021
40.120
22.936
15.166
8.463
5.691
3.428
2.259
1.911
1.616
1.373
1.177
1.096
24.0
353.909
291.005
206.755
154.545
120.018
96.022
41.864
23.933
15.825
8.831
5.938
3.577
2.358
1.994
1.687
1.432
1.228
1.144
25.0
368.655
303.130
215.370
160.985
125.019
100.022
43.608
24.931
16.485
9.199
6.185
3.726
2.456
2.077
1.757
1.492
1.279
1.191
26.0
383.402
315.255
223.984
167.424
130.020
104.023
45.353
25.928
17.144
9.567
6.433
3.875
2.554
2.160
1.827
1.552
1.330
1.239
27.0
398.148
327.380
232.599
173.863
135.021
108.024
47.097
26.925
17.803
9.935
6.680
4.024
2.652
2.243
1.897
1.611
1.381
1.286
28.0
412.894
339.505
241.214
180.303
140.022
112.025
48.841
27.922
18.463
10.303
6.928
4.173
2.751
2.326
1.968
1.671
1.433
1.334
29.0
427.640
351.631
249.829
186.742
145.022
116.026
50.586
28.920
19.122
10.671
7.175
4.322
2.849
2.409
2.038
1.731
1.484
1.382
30.0
442.387
363.756
258.444
193.182
150.023
120.027
52.330
29.917
19.782
11.039
7.422
4.472
2.947
2.492
2.108
1.790
1.535
1.429

PD300 User Manual
129
Extremely inverse characteristic

PD300 User Manual
130
Moderately inverse curve

T := M A +
A = 0.1735
B = 0.6791
C = 0.8000
I C
I C
D = -0.0800
I C
E = 0.1271

M \ I/Io
1.05
1.10
1.20
1.30
1.40
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
4.00
5.00
7.00
10.00
12.00
15.00
20.00
30.00
40.00
0.5
4.872
3.128
1.679
1.114
0.836
0.675
0.379
0.286
0.239
0.191
0.166
0.141
0.123
0.117
0.110
0.104
0.098
0.095
1.0
9.744
6.256
3.357
2.229
1.672
1.351
0.757
0.571
0.478
0.382
0.332
0.281
0.247
0.234
0.221
0.209
0.197
0.191
2.0
19.489
12.511
6.714
4.457
3.343
2.702
1.515
1.142
0.955
0.764
0.665
0.563
0.493
0.467
0.442
0.417
0.393
0.382
3.0
29.233
18.767
10.072
6.686
5.015
4.053
2.272
1.713
1.433
1.145
0.997
0.844
0.740
0.701
0.663
0.626
0.590
0.572
4.0
38.977
25.023
13.429
8.914
6.686
5.404
3.030
2.285
1.910
1.527
1.329
1.126
0.986
0.934
0.884
0.835
0.787
0.763
5.0
48.722
31.278
16.786
11.143
8.358
6.755
3.787
2.856
2.388
1.909
1.662
1.407
1.233
1.168
1.105
1.043
0.983
0.954
6.0
58.466
37.534
20.143
13.371
10.029
8.106
4.544
3.427
2.866
2.291
1.994
1.689
1.479
1.402
1.326
1.252
1.180
1.145
7.0
68.210
43.790
23.500
15.600
11.701
9.457
5.302
3.998
3.343
2.672
2.327
1.970
1.726
1.635
1.547
1.461
1.377
1.335
8.0
77.954
50.045
26.857
17.828
13.372
10.807
6.059
4.569
3.821
3.054
2.659
2.252
1.972
1.869
1.768
1.669
1.573
1.526
9.0
87.699
56.301
30.215
20.057
15.044
12.158
6.817
5.140
4.298
3.436
2.991
2.533
2.219
2.102
1.989
1.878
1.770
1.717
10.0
97.443
62.557
33.572
22.285
16.715
13.509
7.574
5.712
4.776
3.818
3.324
2.815
2.465
2.336
2.210
2.087
1.967
1.908
11.0
107.187
68.813
36.929
24.514
18.387
14.860
8.332
6.283
5.253
4.200
3.656
3.096
2.712
2.569
2.431
2.295
2.163
2.099
12.0
116.932
75.068
40.286
26.742
20.058
16.211
9.089
6.854
5.731
4.581
3.988
3.378
2.958
2.803
2.652
2.504
2.360
2.289
13.0
126.676
81.324
43.643
28.971
21.730
17.562
9.846
7.425
6.209
4.963
4.321
3.659
3.205
3.037
2.873
2.713
2.557
2.480
14.0
136.420
87.580
47.001
31.199
23.402
18.913
10.604
7.996
6.686
5.345
4.653
3.941
3.451
3.270
3.094
2.921
2.753
2.671
15.0
146.165
93.835
50.358
33.428
25.073
20.264
11.361
8.567
7.164
5.727
4.986
4.222
3.698
3.504
3.315
3.130
2.950
2.862
16.0
155.909
100.091
53.715
35.656
26.745
21.615
12.119
9.139
7.641
6.109
5.318
4.504
3.945
3.737
3.536
3.339
3.147
3.052
17.0
165.653
106.347
57.072
37.885
28.416
22.966
12.876
9.710
8.119
6.490
5.650
4.785
4.191
3.971
3.757
3.547
3.343
3.243
18.0
175.398
112.602
60.429
40.113
30.088
24.317
13.633
10.281
8.597
6.872
5.983
5.067
4.438
4.205
3.977
3.756
3.540
3.434
19.0
185.142
118.858
63.787
42.342
31.759
25.668
14.391
10.852
9.074
7.254
6.315
5.348
4.684
4.438
4.198
3.965
3.737
3.625
20.0
194.886
125.114
67.144
44.570
33.431
27.019
15.148
11.423
9.552
7.636
6.647
5.630
4.931
4.672
4.419
4.173
3.933
3.815
21.0
204.630
131.369
70.501
46.799
35.102
28.370
15.906
11.994
10.029
8.017
6.980
5.911
5.177
4.905
4.640
4.382
4.130
4.006
22.0
214.375
137.625
73.858
49.027
36.774
29.720
16.663
12.565
10.507
8.399
7.312
6.193
5.424
5.139
4.861
4.591
4.327
4.197
23.0
224.119
143.881
77.215
51.256
38.445
31.071
17.421
13.137
10.985
8.781
7.645
6.474
5.670
5.372
5.082
4.799
4.523
4.388
24.0
233.863
150.136
80.572
53.484
40.117
32.422
18.178
13.708
11.462
9.163
7.977
6.756
5.917
5.606
5.303
5.008
4.720
4.579
25.0
243.608
156.392
83.930
55.713
41.788
33.773
18.935
14.279
11.940
9.545
8.309
7.037
6.163
5.840
5.524
5.217
4.917
4.769
26.0
253.352
162.648
87.287
57.941
43.460
35.124
19.693
14.850
12.417
9.926
8.642
7.319
6.410
6.073
5.745
5.425
5.113
4.960
27.0
263.096
168.903
90.644
60.170
45.132
36.475
20.450
15.421
12.895
10.308
8.974
7.600
6.656
6.307
5.966
5.634
5.310
5.151
28.0
272.841
175.159
94.001
62.398
46.803
37.826
21.208
15.992
13.373
10.690
9.306
7.882
6.903
6.540
6.187
5.843
5.507
5.342
29.0
282.585
181.415
97.358
64.627
48.475
39.177
21.965
16.564
13.850
11.072
9.639
8.163
7.149
6.774
6.408
6.051
5.703
5.532
30.0
292.329
187.671
100.716
66.855
50.146
40.528
22.722
17.135
14.328
11.454
9.971
8.445
7.396
7.008
6.629
6.260
5.900
5.723

PD300 User Manual
131
Moderately inverse characteristic

PD300 User Manual
132
IV.3. USER CURVES

The user can program two curves, by introducing the points desired in the screen corresponding to the User curve 1 or
User curve 2 console.
The time corresponding to every I/Ia is programmed in seconds, with a minimum value of 0.020 seconds. These times
correspond to the index 1 curve, but as in curves IEC, the user can program an index of times between 0.05 and 1.09 in the
settings of protection currents.
All the model points do not have to be programmed. The console will assign the time of the first programmed point to those
having an I/Ia lower than itself, and the time of the last programmed time to those having an I/Ia higher than itself, that is, in
general the graphic will start and finish with horizontal lines. The intermediate points between two programmed points will be
calculated by the console as a lineal interpolarization between them.
The programming for a I/Ia value of a time higher than the one corresponding to a lower I/Ia, that is, rising lines are not
allowed.
Programming model:

PD300 User Manual
133

Below there is an example:
I/Ia
1.2
12
15
T (s)
200
100
70
50

PD300 User Manual
134
LIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS
APPENDIX V.
V.1. DIGITAL SIGNALS

The following list includes all the available signals in the complete PD300 family. For each model of the family only the
signals corresponding to its available functions will be applied. Both the signals to be sent and their position can be
programmed. The number of signal indicated corresponds to the order with which they leave the factory.
Differential pick up
No. signal
Meaning
0.
Phase A percent differential pick up
1.
Phase B percent differential pick up
2.
Phase C percent differential pick up
3.
Percent differential pick up
4.
Phase A instantaneous differential pick up
5.
Phase B instantaneous differential pick up
6.
Phase C instantaneous differential pick up
7.
Instantaneous differential pick up
8.
Differential pick-up
9.
Phase A 2nd harmonic restraint
10.
Phase B 2nd harmonic restraint
11.
Phase C 2nd harmonic restraint
12.
Phase A 5th harmonic restraint
13.
Phase B 5th harmonic restraint
14.
Phase C 5th harmonic restraint
15.
Earthed
No. signal
Meaning
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
Unit 1 restricted earth pick-up

Unit 2 restricted earth pick-up
Instantaneous earthed pick-up 1 (level
Timed earthed pick-up 1
Timed earthed trip 2
Unit 1 restricted earth trip
Unit 2 restricted earth trip
Instantaneous earthed trip (level 1)
Instantaneous earthed trip 1 (level 2)
1)
2)
1)
2)
Differential trip
No. signal
Meaning
16.
Phase A percent differential trip
17.
Phase B percent differential trip
18.
Phase C percent differential trip
19.
Percent differential trip
20.
Phase A instantaneous differential trip
21.
Phase B instantaneous differential trip
22.
Phase C instantaneous differential trip
23.
Instantaneous differential trip
24.
Differential trip
25.
Function 86 status
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
Winding 1 overcurrent
No. signal
Meaning
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
Phase instantaneous pick-up (level 1)

Residual instantaneous pick-up (level 1)
Unbalance instantaneous pick-up
Phases timed pick-up
Residual timed pick-up
Unbalance time pick-up
Phase instantaneous trip (level 1)
Residual instantaneous trip (level 1)
Unbalance instantaneous trip
Phases timed trip
Residual timed trip
Unbalance time trip

PD300 User Manual
135

No. signal
Meaning
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
Phases timed trip
78.
Residual timed trip
79.
Unbalance time trip
Overcurrent additionals (1)
No. signal
Meaning
96.
97.
98.
99.
100.
101.
102.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
111.
Winding 1 thermal image warning

5th harmonic overexcitation pick-up
Winding 1 thermal image trip

5th harmonic overexcitation trip
Voltage additionals
No. signal
128.
129.
130.
131.
132.
133.
134.
135.
136.
137.
138.
139.
140.
141.
142.
143.
Meaning
Frequency pick-up level 1

Overvoltage pick-up
Overexcitation pick-upV/f unit 1
Overexcitation pick-upV/f unit 2
Frequency trip level 1
Overvoltage trip
Overexcitation trip V/f unit 1
Overexcitation trip V/f unit 2
No. signal
Meaning
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
86.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
Phases timed trip
94.
Residual timed trip
95.
Unbalance time trip
Overcurrent additionals (2)
No. signal
Meaning
112.
113.
114.
115.
116.
117.
118.
119.
120.
121.
122.
123.
124.
125.
126.
127.
Winding
Winding
Winding
Winding
Winding
Winding
Winding
Winding
Winding
1 breaker failure
2 breaker failure
3 breaker failure
1 breaker failure
2 breaker failure
3 breaker failure
1 breaker failure
2 breaker failure
3 breaker failure
pick-up
pick-up
pick-up
trip
trip
trip
re-trip
re-trip
re-trip
Inputs/outputs
No. signal
Meaning
144.
145.
146.
147.
148.
149.
150.
151.
152.
153.
154.
155.
156.
157.
158.
159.
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
Output 6
Output 7

PD300 User Manual
136

Inputs/outputs
No. signal
160.
Input 9
161.
Input 10
162.
Input 11
163.
Input 12
164.
Input 13
165.
Input 14
166.
Input 15
167.
Input 16
168.
Input 17
169.
Output 8
170.
Output 9
171.
Output 10
172.
Output 11
173.
Output 12
174.
Output 13
175.
Output 14
Generals / Breaker (1)
No. signal
192.
193.
194.
195.
196.
197.
198.
199.
200.
201.
202.
203.
204.
205.
206.
207.
Meaning
Meaning
Relay in service
Hw status
Local status
Winding
Winding
Winding
Winding
Winding
Winding
Winding
Winding
Winding
Winding
Winding
Winding
1 breaker status
1 ki2 exceeded
1 breaker open failure
1 breaker close failure
1 breaker open command
1 breaker close command
2 breaker status
2 ki2 exceeded
2 breaker open failure
2 breaker close failure
2 breaker open command
2 breaker close command
Logics
No. signal
Meaning
176.
Logic 1
177.
Logic 2
178.
Logic 3
179.
Logic 4
180.
Logic 5
181.
Logic 6
182.
Logic 7
183.
Logic 8
184.
Logic 9
185.
Logic 10
186.
Logic 11
187.
Logic 12
188.
Logic 13
189.
Logic 14
190.
Logic 15
191.
Breaker (1)
No. signal
Meaning
208.
209.
210.
211.
212.
213.
214.
215.
216.
217.
218.
219.
220.
221.
222.
223.
Winding 3 breaker status

Winding 3 ki2 exceeded
Winding 3 breaker open failure
Winding 3 breaker close failure
Winding 3 breaker open command
Winding 3 breaker close command
Unit 1 tripping circuit failure
Unit 1 close circuit failure

PD300 User Manual
137

Pickup / General trips
No. signal
224.
225.
226.
227.
228.
229.
230.
231.
232.
233.
234.
235.
236.
237.
238.
239.
Meaning
General pick-up
Winding 1 pick-up
Winding 2 pick-up
Winding 3 pick-up
Frequency pick-up
Earthed pick-up
General trip
Winding 1 trip
Winding 2 trip
Winding 3 trip
Frequency trip
Earthed trip
Various
No. signal
Meaning
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Auxiliary supply higher than maximum threshold

Auxiliary supply lower than minimum threshold
Temperature higher than maximum threshold
Temperature lower than minimum threshold
Winding 1 maximeter at zero
Table 1 active
Table 2active
Table 3 active
Table 4 active
Table 5 active
Table 6 active
Differential instantaneous locking
Winding 1 instantaneous locking
Neutral locking instantaneous
Earth restricted locking
Control RTS
Low supply
Events pending of being sent
Irig-B sychronization failure
Various II
No. signal
Meaning
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Signal 1 Relay 1 (GOOSE)

Signa 2 Relay 1 (GOOSE)

PD300 User Manual
138
V.2. MEASUREMENTS
The measurements transmitted as well as the order they are transmitted in can be programmed among all the available
signals. The programming is carried out through the Protection Console SIPCON/P.
In the following list the measurements treated (changes and states)are shown, indicating the order in which they leave the
factory. Each model will be applied only those measurements it disposes.
The background scale indicated corresponds to the count number 4095.
Factory measurement
No.
Background
Data
scale
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
1,2*In
1,2*In
1,2*In
1,2*In
1,2*In
1,2*In
1,2*In
1,2*In
1,2*In
1,2*In
1,2*In
1,2*In
1,2*In
1,2*In
1,2*In
200 V
70 Hz
4095
4095
4095
4095
4095
4095
Free
Winding 1 Ia
Winding 1 Ib
Winding 1 Ic
Winding 1 I average
Winding 1 I maximum
Winding 2 Ia
Winding 2 Ib
Winding 2 Ic
Winding 2 I average
Winding 2 I maximum
Winding 3 Ia
Winding 3 Ib
Winding 3 Ic
Winding 3 I average
Winding 3 I maximum
Voltage
Frequency
Wind. 1 breaker opening No.
Winding 1 ki2 sum
Winding 2 ki2 sum
Winding 3 ki2 sum
Factory
measurement
No.
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Background
scale
Data
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
70 Hz
Winding 1 last fault Ia

Winding 1 last fault Ib
Winding 1 last fault Ic
Last fault voltage
Phase A last fault differential I
Phase B last fault differential I
Phase C last fault differential I
Phase A last fault restraint
Phase B last fault restraint
Phase C last fault restraint
Last fault frequency
Note 1: the background scale of these measurements depend on the model as it is shown in the following table.
Model
2/3 winding
Generator
In = 5 A
32*In = 160A
32A
In = 1 A
32*In = 32A
Mixed (In =1 A and 5A)
32*In = 32A
The indicated background scale corresponds to the secondary measurements; in case of measurements in the primary it will
be multiplied by the transformatio ratio.

PD300 User Manual
139
V.3. COMMANDS
The commands that are sent as well as their order in can be programmed among all the available signals. The programming is
carried out through the Protection Console SIPCON/P.
In the following list the commands treated are shown, indicating the order in which they leave the factory. Each model will
be applied only those measurements it disposes.
Factory
measurement No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
60
61
62
63
64
65
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Command
Activate
Activate
Activate
Activate
Activate
Activate
Activate
Activate
Activate
Activate
Activate
Activate
Activate
Activate
Activate
Activate
Activate
Activate
Activate
Activate
relay
relay
relay
relay
relay
relay
relay
relay
relay
relay
relay
relay
relay
relay
table
table
table
table
table
table
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
Activ. Permanent output 1

Factory
measurement No
22
24
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Command
Open breaker
Close breaker
Unlock closing (function 86)
Open winding 1 breaker
Close winding 1 breaker
Winding 1 locking
Winding 1 unlocking
Winding 2 locking
Winding 2 unlocking
Winding 3 locking
Winding 3 unlocking
Differential locking
Differential unlocking
Restricted earth locking
Restricted earth unlocking
Neutral locking
Neutral unlocking
Deactivate output 1
Deactivate output 2
Deactivate output 3
Deactivate output 4
Deactivate output 5
Deactivate output 6
Deactivate output 7
Deactivate output 8
Deactivate output 9
Deactivate output 10

PD300 User Manual
140

In the following list the local console command treated are shown. They leave the factory as not programmed. They are only
active from the local console (see section Local/remote command). Each model will only be applied those corresponding
to the measurements it disposes.
Factory order No.
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Not programmed
Command
Active relay 1 local console
Open breaker local console
Close breaker local console
Set in telecommand local console

PD300 User Manual
141
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
APPENDIX VI. LOGIC DIAGRAMS

The following pages show the logic diagrams corresponding to the protection functions.
The diagrams referring to functions are only applicable if the functions are enabled, otherwise they are not executed.

PD300 User Manual
142
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
Figure 1. Percent differential.
Figure 2. Harmonic restraint.

PD300 User Manual
143
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
Figure 3. Instantaneous differential.
Figure 4. Restricted earth.

PD300 User Manual
144
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
Figure 5. Closing unlocking (function 86).
Figure 6. Phase overcurrent.

PD300 User Manual
145
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
Figure 7. Residual and unbalance overcurrent.
Figure 8. Ground overcurrent.

PD300 User Manual
146
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
Figure 9. Overvoltage.
Figure 10. 5th harmonic overexcitation.

PD300 User Manual
147
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
Figure 11. V/f overexcitation.
Figure 12. Frequency.
Figure 13. Thermal overload

PD300 User Manual
148
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
Figure 14. Breaker failure Protection
Figure 15. Starts by winding.

PD300 User Manual
149
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
Figure 16. Trips by winding.
Figure 17. Several starts

PD300 User Manual
150
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
Figure 18. Several trips
Figure 19. Pick up/General trip

PD300 User Manual
151
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
Relation of the logic signals and the configuration with the figures.
Abbreviators used:
Phase x is referred to phases A, B, C
Unit z may be 1, 2. It is applied to restricted earth, earth connection
Level y may be 1 and 2
Winding d may be 1, 2, 3
Frequency step f may be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Differential signals
Digital Signal
x Percent Differential Start
Percent Differential Start
x Inst. Differential Start
Instantaneous Differential Start
Differential Start
x 2th harmonic
x 5th harmonic
x Percent Differential trip
Percent Differential trip
x Inst Differential trip
Instantaneius Differential trip
Differential trip
Function 86 Status
Name in Sipcon
Inst. Differential Start
Differential Start
x 2th harmonic
x 5th harmonic
Inst Differential trip
Differential trip
Function 86 State
Name in figure
Inst. Differential Start
Differential Start
x 2th harmonic
x 5th harmonic
Inst Differential trip
Differential trip
Closing Locking
Figure number
Figure 1
Figure 17
Figure 3
Figure 17
Figure 17
Figure 2
Figure 2
Figure 1
Figure 18
Figure 3
Figure 18
Figure 18
Figure 5
Name in Sipcon
z Restricted Ground Start
z Restricted Ground Trip
Name in figure
Start 87G z
Trip 87G z
Figure number
Figure 4
Figure 4
Ground IOC Start z Lev y
Ground IOC Start z levely
Figure 8
Ground TOC Start. z
Ground TOC Start z
Figure 8
Ground IOC Trip z Lev. y
Ground IOC `Trip z level y
Figure 8
Ground TOC Trip. z
Ground TOC Trip z
Figure 8
Earthed signal
Digital Signal
Unit z restricted earth pick up
Unit z restricted earth trip
Instantaneous earthed pick up z (level
y)
Timed earthed pick up z
Instantaneous earthed trip z (level
y)
Timed earthed trip z
Signals per winding

Digital signal
Phase Instantaneous pick up (level y)
Residual Instantaneous pick up(level
y)
Unbalance Instantaneous pick up
Phase timed pick up
Residual timed pick up
Unbalance timed pick up
Phase Instantaneous trip(level y)
Residual Instantaneous trip (level y)
Unbalance Instantaneous trip
Phase timed trip
Residual timed trip
Unbalance timed trip
Winding d thermal image warning
Winding d thermal image trip
Winding d breaker failure pick up
Winding d breaker failure trip
Winding d breaker failure retrip
Name in Sipcon
Phase IOC Start. d Lev. y
Name in figure
Phase IOC Start. d Lev. y
Figure number
Figure 15
Res. IOC Start. d Lev. y
Res. IOC Start. d Lev. y
Figure 7
IOC Unbalance Start d

Phase TOC Start. d
Res. TOC Start. d
TOC Unbalance Start. d
Phase IOC Trip d Lev. y
Res. IOC Trip d Lev. y
IOC Unbalance Trip d
Phase TOC Trip d
Res. TOC Trip d
TOC Unbalance d
Thermal overload Start d
Thermal overload tripd
52BF Dev. d Start
52BF Dev. d Trip
52BF Dev. d Retrip
IOC Unbalance Start

Phase TOC Start. d
Res. TOC Start. d
TOC Unbalance Start.
Phase IOC Trip d Lev. y
Res. IOC Trip Lev. y
IOC Unbalance Trip
Phase TOC Trip d
Res. TOC Trip level y
TOC Unbalance
Thermal overload Start
Thermal overload trip
BF Dev. d Start
BF Dev. d Trip
BF Dev. d Retrip
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
7
15
7
7
16
7
7
16
7
7
13
13
14
14
14

PD300 User Manual
152
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
Overexcitation, voltage and frequency signals

Digital signal
5th harmonic overexcitation pick up
5th harmonic overexcitation trip
Frequency pick up level f
Frequency trip level f
Overvoltage pick up
Overvoltage trip
Overexcitation pick up V/f unit y
Overexcitation trip V/f unit y
Name in Sipcon
5 Harm. Overexc. Start
5 Harm. Overexc. trip
Frequency Start f
Frequency trip f
V/F start.
V/F Trip
V/F start. (y)
V/F Trip (y)
Name in figure
5 Harm. Overexc. Start
5 Harm. Overexc. trip
Frequency Start step f
Frequency Trip step f
V/F start.
V/F Trip
24V/f pick up unit y
24V/f trip unit y
Figure number
Figure 17
Figure 18
Figure 12
Figure 12
Figure 9
Figure 9
Figure 11
Figure 11
Name in Sipcon
Pick up d
Trip d
Frequency pick up
Frequency trip
Neutral pick up
Neutral trip
General pick up
General trip
Name in figure
Pick up winding d
Trip winding d
Frequency pick up
Frequency trip
Neutral pick up
Neutral trip
General pick up
General trip
Figure number
Figure 15
Figure 16
Figure 17
Figure 18
Figure 17
Figure 18
Figure 19
Figure 19
General signals
Digital signal
Winding d pick up
Winding d trip
Frequency pick up
Frequency trip
Earthed pick up
Earthed trip
General pick up
General trip

PD300 User Manual
153
DNP 3.0 RTU PROTOCOL
APPENDIX VII. DNP 3.0 RTU PROTOCOL

This function allows communicating with a remote control station, using the communication protocol DNP3 at the level of control
messages.
The unit behaves as a remote position RTU.
The format by character is:
1 start bit.
8 data bits.
1 parity bit configurable between none, even and odd parity.
1 stop bit, configurable between 1 and 2 stop bit.
The baud speed can be chosen among 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400 bauds.
VII.1. SETTINGS
UCL ADDRESS
MASTER ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY
BITS STOP
RTS FIXED
COMMUNIC. CONTROL
CTS. WAIT. T
CAR. WAIT TIME.
STABILI. T
ACK. WAIT T
SYNCHRONI. T
ACK LINK
APPLIC. M. BYTES. N.
CHANGE T
Word type parameter. It allows identifying the number of remote station. Range 0 - 65532.
Default value 1.
Word type parameter. It allows identifying the master station address. Range 0 - 65532.
Default value 0.
This word type parameter allows to set the baud rate : 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600
19200 - 38400) bauds.
Default value 9600
It allows configuring the parity to be used in the transmission. Even, odd or none parity.
The advised default value is none parity, as indicated in DNP3 protocol.
It allows selecting the number of stop bits. 1 or 2 stop bits
The advised default value is 1 stop bit, as indicated in DNP3 protocol.
When its value is YES the RTS signal is kept permanently active.
Default value NO.
It allows to select if the control if pins RTS and CTS is performed: NO RTS+CTS, RTS
Default value NO
It indicates the time, which is being waited for the CTS activation, after the RTS activation.
Range 0 - 100.
Default value 20.
It indicates the time, , which is being waited, once activated the CTS, to start the transmission with
the objective to stabilise the carrier.
Firmware Version
Q and subsequent
P and previous
Units
milliseconds
hundredths of seconds
Value between
0 and 3000
0 and 100.
Default value
200
20.
It indicates the time, , which is being waited, once activated the CTS, to start the transmission with
the objective to stabilise the carrier.
Firmware Version
Q and subsequent
P and previous
Units
milliseconds
hundredths of seconds
Value between
0 and 3000
0 and 100.
Default value
200
20.
Waiting timeout to confirm the csg link.
Range 0 - 1000.
Default value 500.
Required time in minutes to ask the master for synchronization
Range 0 - 10.
Default value 0.
Indicates if confirm is required al link level.
YES = confirm is required.
NO = confirm. is not required
Default value NO.
Maximum number of bytes in an application segment. Range 1024 - 3072.
Default value 1024.
Transfer time of the default changes. It can take the following values:
BOTH = sent with absolute and relative values.

PD300 User Manual
154

WITHOU TIME = sent without time.
ABSOLUTE = sent with absolute time.
RELATIVE = sent with relative time.
Default value ABSOLUTE.
It indicates if the counters are frozen with or without time. It performs only in the case that a 0
variation is requested.
FROZEN T
WITH TIME = sent with time.
WITHOUT TIME = sent without time.
Default value WITH TIME.
It indicates if in the answer message to a class 0 data request, the objects of digital signals,
measurements and counters with or without status are sent.
Value 0->it does not send status for any signal.
bit 0-> everything is sent with status. to one
bit 1->it sends digital signals with status.
STATUS SENDING
bit 2->it sends measurements with status.
bit 3->it sends counters with status.
bit 4->it sends frozen counters with status.
There are two ways to send everything with status: to write a 1 or a 14
Default value 0.
It indicates the format in which the counters are sent when the Var field is not specified in the
request, and as non requested changes.
MEAS16_32
16 BITS = they are sent in 16 bits.
Default value 32 BITS.
It indicates the format in which the counters are sent when the Var field is not specified in the
request, and as non requested changes.
CON 16_32
Default value 32 BITS.
At value YES it allows the transfer of non requested messages with class data 1, 2 or 3.
NOT REQUESTED MSG
Default value NO.
At value YES a treatment is performed to prevent collisions. At value NO the DCD is not checked.
PREV. COLLISION
Default value NO.
Waiting time set in hundredths of second which the unit waits since it is allowed to transfer
through the DCD. Range 0 - 1000.
COL.FIXED T
Range 0 - 1000.
Default value 10..
Variable waiting time. Depending on the selected value it can be obtained the maximum value
which can be reached by the hundredths of seconds. This value will be a random value between 0
and such maximum.
COL. VBLE. T
Possible values: 1-3-5-7-15-31-63-127-255
Note: it must be highlighted that the time delay is reset once the DCD is lost.
Default value 7.
It is the time in seconds in which the unit waits to try again the transfer of non requested data,
when it does not receive the link confirmation and the application to an old transfer and its
RESENDING T.
reattempt after the answer waiting time.
Range 0 630 seconds
Default value 20.
Maximum number of repetitions of a non requested message. At infinite zero value.
Range 0 - 65535.
NOT REQ. MAX. NUM
Default value 0.
It allows to activate some particular aspects of the operation.
BIT 0->0x0001 Transfer of actual counters with OBJ=21.
BIT 1->0x0002 Reserve.
BIT 2->0x0004 Transfer of non requested message up to the included IIN every 10 seconds
ESPECIAL
BIT 6->0x0040 It does not transfer the restart message when starting.
BIT 7->0x0080 Trip close.
Default value 0.
It indicates the measurements transfer format.1
COUNTS
MEASUREMENT FORMAT
SECONDARY (CALCULATED)
PRIMARY
1
From version R onwards, it has been added the option Primary, which gives the measurements in the primary. The option Calculated or Secondary gives the
measurements in the secondary.

PD300 User Manual
155
VII.2. OPERATION INDICATIONS

VII.2.1 Spontaneous message indicating RESTART
At RTU starting, in the case that the transfer of spontaneous non requested messages is enabled, it will be sent a
spontaneous and empty message which activates the bit corresponding to the IIN RESTART requiring application
confirmation.
It will stop transferring when receiving the application confirmation with the correct application sequence number. For
the repetition times associated to this message, they will be applied as for the rest of the spontaneous messages,
except in the number of reattempts before cancelling the message, this means that the setting NOT REQUESTED
MAX is not considered in this message.
VII.2.2 Synchronization
The bit corresponding to Need Time in the IIN is activated periodically according to the value of the setting
SYNCHRONI. T.
VII.2.3 Treatment and detection of digital changes

It is maintained a circular queue of 1024 changes, which stores the changes in the signals in order to transfer them to
the control centre. Changes of digital signals by communications can be filtered by configuring 0 class, this can be
done for individual signals or for all.
No changes are detected at the starting of the unit and until it does not start communicating.
The setting ERASE DATA ? does not act over the DNP3 protocol
VII.2.4 Transfer of spontaneous messages

For the transfer of spontaneous messages, if there are any messages stored in the different classes of changes, the
priority of classes will be followed, this means that the queue class 1 is emptied first, then the class 2 and last the
class 3.
If the parameter NOT REQUESTED MESSAGES at value 1 is not found, no spontaneous message is sent.
A treatment of collisions will be performed depending on the parameter PREV. COLLISION. The signal DCD is used
along with the parameters COL.FIXED T and COL.VBLE. T.
In the case that no answer is obtained to the messages of non-requested changes, a reattempt will be performed once
expired the time defined by the parameter ACK. WAIT. T. Then periodical transfers will be performed according to the
parameter RESENDING T Each time a message is repeated, all the new changes will be included in it, so that the
message is created again at each repetition.
VII.2.5 Particular aspects of the operation

Only one reading or writing order can be selected or executed each time.
The selection of orders and writings will be kept during 15sc.
There is a change queue for digital signals.
If frozen counters are requested and these have not been frozen previously, they are answered at value 0 and with time
set to 0.

PD300 User Manual
156

In the event of receiving a request for any system static object and this does not exist, it will be answered up to the IIN
and indicating an unknown object.
VII.3. DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
Vendor Name: INGETEAM TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION S.A.
Device Name: SIPC
Highest DNP Level Supported:
Device Function:
For Requests
Level 3
Master
Slave
For Responses Level 3
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is
described in the attached table):
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets):
Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted
292
Transmitted
1024< >3072( configurable)
Received
292
Received
1024
Maximum Data Link Re-tries:
Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
None
None
Fixed at
1
Configurable, range ____ to ____
Configurable, range __ to __
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
Never
Always
Sometimes
Configurable
PARAMETER DATA_ACK = 1
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
When reporting Event Data
When sending multi-fragment responses
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm
None Fixed at _________
Variable
Configurable
Complete Appl. Fragment
Variable
Configurable
Application Confirm
None Fixed at __10 sg____
Variable
Configurable
Complete Appl. Response
Variable
Configurable
Others
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
WRITE Binary Outputs
Never Always Sometimes
Configurable
SELECT/OPERATE
Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE
Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK
Configurable
Count > 1
Configurable
Pulse On
Configurable
Pulse Off
Configurable
Latch On
Configurable
Latch Off
Configurable
Queue
Configurable
Clear Queue
Configurable
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no specific variation
Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no specific
requested:
variation requested:
Never
Never
Only time-tagged
Binary Input Change With Time
Only non-time-tagged
Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Configurable to send both, one or the other (attach explanation) Configurable (attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses:
Never
Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
Configurable (attach explanation)
Never
Only certain objects
When Device Restarts
Sometimes (attach explanation)
When Status Flags Change
ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED
Function codes supported
Supports Collision Avoidance:
Collision Avoidance Detection Method:
Configurable
DCD

PD300 User Manual
157
DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
Counters Roll Over at:
No Counters Reported
16 Bits
32 Bits
Other Value _____________
Point-by-point list attached
Default Counter Object/Variation:

No Counters Reported
Default Object _________
Default Variation ______
Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:
Yes
No
VII.4. IMPLEMENTATION TABLE

OBJECT
REQUEST
(slave must parse)
Func Codes (dec) Qual Codes (hex)
1,22
00,01,06, 07,08
1
00,01,06, 07,08
1
00,01,06, 07,08
1
06,07,08
20*,21*
06
1
06,07,08
1
06,07,08
1
06,07,08
1
00,01,06
RESPONSE
(master must parse)
Func Codes Qual Codes (hex)
Obj
1
1
1
Var
0
1
2
Description
Binary Input All Variations
Binary Input
Binary Input with Status
Binary Input Change - All Variations
2
2
2
10
10
10
12
12
1
2
3
0
1
2
0
Binary Input Change without Time

Binary Input Change with Time
Binary Input Change with Relative Time
Binary Output - All Variations
Binary Output
Binary Output Status
Control Block - All Variations
Control Relay Output Block
3, 4, 5, 6
12
12
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
22
22
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
0
1
Pattern Control Block

Pattern Mask
Binary Counter - All Variations
32-Bit Binary Counter
16-Bit Binary Counter
32-Bit Delta Counter
16-Bit Delta Counter
32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
32-Bit Delta Counter without Flag
16-Bit Delta Counter without Flag
Frozen Counters - All Variations
32-Bit Frozen Counter
16-Bit Frozen Counter
32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter
16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter
32-Bit Frozen Counter with Time of Freeze
16-Bit Frozen Counter with Time of Freeze
32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time of Freeze
16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time of Freeze
32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag
16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag
32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag
16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag
Counter Change Event All Variations
32-Bit Counter Change Event without Time
1, 7, 8, 9, 10,22 00,01,06, 07,08

1, 7, 8, 9, 10
00,01,06, 07,08 129
1, 7, 8, 9, 10
00,01,06, 07,08 129
1
00,01,06, 07,08 129
1
00,01,06, 07,08 129
1
00,01,06, 07,08 129
1
00,01,06, 07,08 129
1
00,01,06, 07,08 129
1
00,01,06, 07,08 129
1, 22
00,01,06
1
00,01,06
129
1
00,01,06
129
1
00,01,06
129
1
00,01,06
129
1
00,01,06
129
1
00,01,06
129
1
00,01,06
129
1
00,01,06
129
1
00,01,06
129
1
00,01,06
129
1
00,01,06
129
1
00,01,06
129
1
06,07,08
1
06,07,08
129, 130
22
16-Bit Counter Change Event without time
22
32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without Time 1
129
129
00,01
00,01
129, 130
129, 130
129, 130
28
28
28
00,01,06
129
00,01
17, 28
129
Echo of request
06,07,08
129, 130
06, 07, 08
129
00,01
00,01
00,01
00,01
00, 01
00, 01
00,01
00,01
00,01
00,01
00,01
00,01
00, 01
00, 01
00,01
00,01
00,01
00,01
00,01
00,01
28
28
28

PD300 User Manual
158

REQUEST
(slave must parse)
Var Description
Func Codes (dec) Qual Codes (hex)
4
16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without Time 1
06, 07, 08
5
32-Bit Counter Change Event with Time
6
16-Bit Counter Change Event with Time
7
32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event with Time
8
16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event with Time
0
Frozen Counter Events All Variations
1
06, 07, 08
1
32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without Time
1
06, 07, 08
2
16-Bit Frozen Counter Event without Time
1
06, 07, 08
3
32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event without Time 1
06, 07, 08
4
16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event without Time 1
06, 07, 08
5
32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time
6
16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time
7
32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event with Time
8
16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event with Time
0
Analog Input - All Variations
1, 22
00,01,06, 07,08
1
32-Bit Analog Input
1
00,01,06, 07,08
2
16-Bit Analog Input
1
00,01,06, 07,08
3
32-Bit Analog Input without flag
1
00,01,06, 07,08
4
16-Bit Analog Input without flag
1
00,01,06, 07,08
0
Frozen Analog Input - All Variations
1
32-Bit Frozen Analog Input
2
16-Bit Frozen Analog Input
3
32-Bit Frozen Analog Input with Time of Freeze
4
16-Bit Frozen Analog Input with Time of Freeze
5
32-Bit Frozen Analog Input without Flag
6
16-Bit Frozen Analog Input without Flag
1
06,07,08
0
Analog Change Event - All Variations
20*,21*
06
1
32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time
1
06,07,08
2
16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time
1
06,07,08
3
32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time
4
16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time
0
Frozen Analog Event - All Variations
1
32-Bit Frozen Analog Event without Time
2
16-Bit Frozen Analog Event without Time
3
32-Bit Frozen Analog Event with Time
4
16-Bit Frozen Analog Event with Time
0
Analog Output Status - All Variations
1
00, 01, 06
1
32-Bit Analog Output Status
1
00, 01, 06
2
16-Bit Analog Output Status
1
00, 01, 06
1
32-Bit Analog Output Block
2
16-Bit Analog Output Block
3, 4, 5, 6
17, 28
0
Time and Date - All Variations
2
07, quantity = 1
1
Time and Date
1
07 quantity = 1
2
Time and Date with Interval
0
Time and Date CTO - All Variations
1
Time and Date CTO
2
Unsynchronized Time and Date CTO
0
Time Delay - All Variations
1
Time Delay Coarse
2
Time Delay Fine
0
Not Defined
1
Class 0 Data
1
06
1
06,07,08
2
Class 1 Data
20, 21,22
06
1
06,07,08
3
Class 2 Data
20, 21, 22
06
1
06,07,08
4
Class 3 Data
20, 21, 22
06
OBJECT
Obj
22
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
30
30
30
30
30
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
32
32
32
32
32
33
33
33
33
33
40
40
40
41
41
50
50
50
51
51
51
52
52
52
60
60
60
60
60
RESPONSE
(master must parse)
Func Codes Qual Codes (hex)
129
28
129
129
129
129
129
28
28
28
28
129
129
129
129
00, 01
00,01
00, 01
00, 01
129, 130
129, 130
28
28
129
129
00,01
00,01
129
Echo of request
129
07
129
129
07, quantity=1
07, quantity=1
129
07, quantity=1
quantity = 1

PD300 User Manual
159
OBJECT
Obj
70
Var Description
1
File Identifier
80
Internal Indications
81
82
83
83
90
100
100
100
101
101
101
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
Storage Object
Device Profile
Private Registration Object
Private Registration Object Descriptor
Application Identifier
Short Floating Point
Long Floating Point
Extended Floating Point
Small Packed Binary-Coded Decimal
Medium Packed Binary-Coded Decimal
Large Packed Binary-Coded Decimal
No Object
No Object
REQUEST
RESPONSE
(slave must parse)
(master must parse)
Func Codes (dec) Qual Codes (hex) Func Codes Qual Codes (hex)
1
2
00, 01
00
index=7
129
00
13, 14
23
Compatibility with. IBM
VII.5. SIGNAL LISTS

VII.5.1 Digital signals
The signals transmitted and the order they are transmitted in can be programmed among the available ones. The
programming is carried out through the Protection Console SIPCON/P.
In the appendix List of available signals the digital signals treated (changes and status) are shown, indicating the
order with which they leave the factory (signal no.). Each model will be only applied those measurements
corresponding to the functions it disposes.
VII.5.2 Analogue measurements

The measurements transmitted and the order they are transmitted in can be programmed among the available ones.
The programming is carried out through the Protection Console SIPCON/P
In the appendix List of available signals the measurements treated, are shown, indicating the order with which they
leave the factory (signal no.). Each model will be only applied those corresponding to the measurements it disposes.
The measurement format with which it leaves the factory is counts.
The background scale indicated corresponds to the 4095 count number.
VII.5.3 Commands
The commands transmitted and the order they are transmitted in can be programmed among the available ones. The
programming is carried out through the Protection Console SIPCON/P
In the appendix List of available signals the commands treated, are shown, indicating the order with which they
leave the factory (signal no.). Each model will be only applied those corresponding to the functions it disposes.

PD300 User Manual
160
MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
APPENDIX VIII. MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

The communications module MODBUS RTU implemented in the protection unit allows the communication as slave station with a
master position via the rear communication port (RS232, RS485 or Optical fibre).
VIII.1. PROTOCOL CHARACTERISTICS

VIII.1.1 Messages format
Master question:
Remote address -
1 byte
Function code
1 byte
Data
variable number of bytes
CRC
2 byte
Slave answer:
Remote address -
1 byte
Function code
1 byte
Data
variable number of bytes
CRC
2 byte
Remote address: PD300 address in respect to the Modbus protocol (range 1 to 255). Only broadcast messages are
accepted (address 0) for synchronization with the function 16.
Function code: If >127 (Byte MSB at 1) means that the remote address has not fulfilled the required function and
it is going to respond with an error code.
Data : Each data word is sent MSByte first, followed by LSByte.
CRC : LSByte is sent first, followed by MSByte.
CRC generator polynomy:
x16 + x15 + x2 +1
VIII.1.2 MODBUS Functions
The following functions are used within the defined by the MODBUS protocol:
03 Read Setpoints and Actual Values
04 Read Setpoints and Actual Values
(functions 03 and 04 are used without distinction)
05 Execute Operation
07 Read Device Status
08 Loopback Test
16 Store Multiple Setpoints

PD300 User Manual
161
MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
VIII.1.3 Message examples

Function codes 03 and 04 Read Setpoints and Actual Values
Reading of settings, digital status, measurements and counters.
Example :
Remote address :
01
Address :
0400 - Data : 00aa
Address :
0401 - Data : 00ff
Question:
Description
Remote address
Bytes
-
Function code
Data address
Example (hex)
1 byte
01
1 byte
03
2 bytes
03
data address
08
Data number
2 bytes
00
Data number (words)
02
CRC
2 bytes
xx
xx
Answer :
Description
Bytes
Example (hex)
Remote address
1 byte
01
Function code
1 byte
03
Bytes counter
1 byte
04
2 records = 4 bytes
Data1
2 bytes
00
Value in 0400
aa
Data2
2 bytes
00
Value in 0401
ff
CRC
2 byte
xx
xx

PD300 User Manual
162
MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
Function 05 code Execute Operation

Execute operation.
Example :
Remote address 01
Code operation :
01 (Command number 1)
Question :
Description
Bytes
Example (hex)
Remote address
1 byte
01
Function code
1 byte
05
Operation code
2 byte
01
00
ff
00
xx
Operation range
CRC
2 byte
2 byte
Command 1
Execute command
xx
Answer :
Description
Bytes
Example (hex)
Remote address
1 byte
01
Function code
1 byte
05
Operation code
2 byte
01
00
ff
00
xx
Value
CRC
2 byte
2 byte
Command 1
Execute command
xx
Function code 07 Read Device Status

Reading of the protection status.
Question :
Description
Bytes
Example (hex)
Remote address
1 byte
01
Function code
1 byte
07
CRC
2 byte
xx
xx

PD300 User Manual
163
MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

Answer :
Description
Bytes
Example (hex)
Remote address
1 byte
01
Function code
1 byte
03
Status
1 byte
04
CRC
2 byte
xx
xx
Function 08 code Loopback Test

Link state test (communications).
Question :
Description
Remote address
Bytes
-
Function code
Code
Example (hex)
1 byte
01
1 byte
08
2 byte
00 must be 0
00
Data
2 byte
00 must be 0
00
CRC
2 byte
xx
xx
Answer :
Description
Bytes
Example (hex)
Remote address
1 byte
01
Function code
1 byte
08
Code
2 byte
00 must be 0
00
Data
2 byte
00 must be 0
00
CRC
2 byte
xx
xx
Function 16 codes Read Setpoints and Actual Values

Writing of protection values
Example :
Remote address: 01
Address : 1000 - Data : 0144
Address : 1001 - Data : 0255
Question:

PD300 User Manual
164
MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

Description
Bytes
Example (hex)
Remote address
1 byte
01
Function code
1 byte
10
Data initial address
2 bytes
10
Data address
00
Data number
2 bytes
00
Data number (words)
02
Bytes counter
1 byte
04
2 registers = 4 bytes
Data1
2 bytes
01
Value in 0400
44
Data2
2 bytes
02
Value in 0401
55
CRC
2 bytes
xx
xx
Answer :
Description
Bytes
Example (hex)
Remote address
1 byte
01
Function code
1 byte
10
2 bytes
10
Data initial address
Data address
00
Data number
2 bytes
00
Data numbers (words)
02
CRC
2 bytes
xx
xx
VIII.1.4 Unit status request

It is made with function: 07 Read Device Status
The unit status byte contains following information:
Bit 0 : Error in ADC converter
Bit 1 : Non critical error
Bit 2 : Critical error
Bit 3 : Protection in service
The same information can be obtained by reading the address 0009h.

PD300 User Manual
165
MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
VIII.1.5 Change request of digital signals

There is a mechanism, which allows collecting information of all digital signals changes along with the time instant
when they occurred..
By reading the address 05000h it can be obtained the number of pending changes in the buffer.
From the address 05002h a buffer is available, where the 25 oldest unit changes can be read. Once received a
message of changes, writing the value 0 in the address 05001h the master position validates the changes sent in the
message.
It is always demanded that the request comes with the initial address of the buffer of changes (05002h).
It is demanded that the number of words required is multiple of 5 (it must be read blocks of complete changes).
It cannot be asked for more data than the buffer size or than the number of changes in queue (it means, if there is
only one pending change, it is not possible to ask for two).
Given that the maximum number of words, which can be sent in a message, is 127 (limited for the field of number of
bytes in 1 byte), the buffer of changes is sized to contain 25 changes.
25 changes * 5 words / change = 125 words. (250 bytes).
To know how many changes there are in a zone of changes reading it must be done a reading of the number of pending
changes in the buffer through a reading of the address 05000h. In the low byte of the read register we will find the
number of pending changes (which will be a number between 0 and 25) and in the byte 15 of the register it can be
read the overflow indication of the changes in queue (for value 1 an overflow in the changes queue has occurred).
Afterwards, changes can be requested up to the maximum number previously indicated. To validate the changes
received we must write the value 0 in the address 05001h through the function 16. This writing makes possible that
the changes in the remote station are considered as sent; otherwise the remote station would consider them again as
pending.
If the remote station had more changes, which would be indicated in the value of the number of pending changes and
the master station could request them by repeating the process.
To collect all the changes of the remote station, the process would have to continue until the reading of the pending
changes indicates value 0..
Structure format of a digital change :

Changes : IDC + Binary time
IDC
:=
CP 16{IDENTIF, CHANGE}
IDENTIF
:=
UI 10[1..10] <0..1023>
CHANGE
:=
BS 6{Res, V, E, v, e}
with
Res
:=
BS 2[11..12] not used (always <0>)
:=
BS 1[13] <0..1>
<0>
:=
Valid status
<1>
:=
Not valid status
:=
BS 1[14] <0..1>
<0>
:=
Status as "0" after the change
<1>
:=
Status as "1" after the change
:=
BS 1[15] <0..1>

PD300 User Manual
166
MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
<0>
:=
The validation bit V has not changed
<1>
:=
The validation bit V has changed
:=
BS 1[16] <0..1>
<0>
:=
The status bit E has not changed
<1>
:=
The status bit E has changed
With these two bytes and by assigning a code for each signal, it is identified each digital signal of control which has
suffered any change and which is transmitted with the control measurements, as well as what has changed in the
digital signal and the status and validation after the change.
CP56Time2a:=CP56{Milliseconds, Minutes, Res1, Invalid, Hours, Res2, Summer time, Day of the month, Day of the
week, Month, Res3, Year, Res4}
This binary time is defined in the section 6.8 of the document IEC 870-5-4. The day of the week corresponding to
value 1 is Sunday.
The complete structure of the change has therefore the following format:
IDENFTIF
e
IV
RES1
SU
RES2
DAY OF THE WEEK (3 bits)
RES3
RES4
Reserve
IDENTIF
Milliseconds (LSByte)
Milliseconds (MSByte)
Minutes (6 bits)
HOURS (5 bits)
DAY OF THE MONTH (5 bits)
MONTH (4 bits)
YEAR (7bits)
VIII.1.6 Data request by user map

The user map allows the non-consecutive registers reading in a single message.
It has an address zone (from the address 0180h, 124 registers) and a values zone in the user map (from the address
0100h , 124 records).
In the address zone it must be written through the function 16 the addresses of those registers we wish to read..
Through the reading of the data zone it could be read the data whose addresses have been configured.
It could be read or written from any of the user map addresses, as long as the end of them is not exceeded. It is
demanded that the read addresses of the user map have associated a valid address in its address zone (this type of
request is limited to the data zone: signals, Measurements and counters, addresses between the 0400 and the
0480h).
VIII.1.7 Synchronization
From 00f0h on:
Address
00f0h
00f1h
00f2h
00f3h
MSB
Milliseconds
Hours
Month
-
LSB
Milliseconds
Minutes
Day
Year

PD300 User Manual
167
MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

The synchronization of the unit is carried out through function 16, writing the 4 words in the indicated address. The
partial writing of any date is not allowed, but the complete structure writing.
The unit does not carry out any correction of the received value so the central centre will take into account the delay
of the communication channel in order to correct the date and time to be sent.
In this address the current time of the unit can also be read. Any address can be read as long as it range does not
exceed the address 00f3h.
VIII.1.8 Commands execution

The commands execution can be performed in two ways: with function 05 or with function 16.
To execute a command through function 05 to the value of the field operation code must be sent the command
number and to the field Operation value must be sent the value 0xff00 (Execute command).
To execute a command through function 16, the command code must be written in the command address (0080h).
Only 1 register writing is accepted.
VIII.1.9 Error codes

The unit can send the following error codes in answer to a message:
01 - Non implemented function
02 - Illegal address in the data field (reserved address or non valid range for required operation)
03 -> Illegal data value
Causes for error code sending :
Reading function (03,04) :

It can not be read more than 127 registers : 03 -> Illegal data value
Reserved or unknown initial address: 02 -> Illegal address in data field.
Number of data required exceeds the allowed range according to data type: 03 -> Illegal data value
Change request where the number of registers is not multiple of 5 or exceeds the number of changes data: 03 ->
Illegal data value
Data request through user map with a non-configured or illegal address: 02 -> Illegal address in data field
Writing function (16):

The bytes counter field does not correspond with field registers number: 03 -> Illegal data value
Reserved or unknown initial address: 02 -> Illegal address in data field
Configuration of the user map with a reserved or illegal address: 02 -> Illegal address in data field
VIII.2. PARAMETERS
The following parameters can be accessible through keyboard/display:
Address of remote station: Address in respect to the protocol MODBUS/RTU.
Value between 1 and 255 (broadcast address 0 non admitted).
Baud rate : Value between 300 and 38400 bauds.
Parity: None, Odd or Even

PD300 User Manual
168
MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

Waiting time for the RTS activation: Waiting delay after receiving a message and before activating the RTS signal for
transmission. Value between 0 and 1000 msec.
Waiting time for carrier stabilisation: Waiting delay once activated the RTS signal before transmitting the first character of the
message. Value between 0 and 1000 msec.
For the case of RS485 this waiting delay is necessary and it must have a minimum value of 4 msec. Value between 0 and
1000 msec.
Waiting time for deactivation of RTS : Waiting delay after the transmission of a message and before deactivating the RTS
signal. Value between 4 and 1000 msec.
VIII.3. UNIT ADDRESSES MAP

Address (hex) Description
Unit identification
0000
Function (manufacturer internal code)
0002
Rated current
0003
Voltage
0004
Frequency
0005
Options
0007
Communications
0008
Software version
0009
Protection status
Command address (Write Only)
0080
Command code to execute
System date and Hour
00F0
Milliseconds
00F1
Hours and Minutes
00F2
Month and Day
00F3
Year
User map
0100
User map values (124 values)
017C
User map addresses (124 values)
Reading zone
0400
Digital status 1
0401
Digital status 2
0402
Digital status 3
0403
Digital status 4
0404
Digital status 5
0405
Digital status 6
0406
Digital status reserve (10 registers)
042A
Measurement 1 (see "Measurements to control")
042B
Measurement 2
042C
Measurement 3
042D
Measurement 4
042E
Measurement 5
042F
Measurement 6
0430
Measurement 7
0431
Measurement 8
..
..
042C
Measurements reserve
04AA
Counter 1
04AB
Counter 2
04AC
Counter 3
04AD
Counter 4
..
..
0458
Counters reserve (40 registers, 20 counters)
Zone of status changes in digital signals
05000
Number of changes waiting to be sent
05001
Validation of the sent changes (Write Only))
Range
Step Unit
Format
Default value
2 charact
F04
F05
F06
F07
F08
F03
F09
"84"
"1"
"A"
"U"
"B0"
"4"
F10
0-59999
0-24 / 0-59
0-12 / 0-31
0-99
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
-4095 to
-4095 to
-4095 to
-4095 to
-4095 to
-4095 to
-4095 to
-4095 to
..
4095
4095
4095
4095
4095
4095
4095
4095
0-4294967295
0-4294967295
0-4294967295
0-4294967295
..
0 ..25
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
..
1
1
1
1
1
..
1
Internal
Internal
Internal
Internal
Internal
Internal
Internal
Internal
F21
F21
F21
F21
F21
F21
F21
F21
..
F21
F02
F02
F02
F02
..
F02
F01
F01

PD300 User Manual
169
MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

Address (hex) Description
05002
Digital changes reading zone (250 registers)
Free memory zone
05FC
Free
HF
Free
Range
Step Unit
Format
F22
Default value
---
Measurements starting from the address 0410h will be the ones to be programmed. The order in which they are sent is also
programmable. The programming is carried out through the Protections console SIPCON/P. It is allowed up to a maximum of
64 values
The value of the measurements sent can be found in internal units (value between 4095). Each value will have associated a
scale range, which could permit obtaining the value in physical units.
In the same way, the digital states and the order they are sent in are programmable, as well as the commands.
For more information about the available magnitudes as well as their scale ranges consult the section: Other Functions ->
Control Messages.
VIII.4. DATA FORMATS

Name
F01
F02
F03
F04
F05
F06
F07
F08
F09
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
Format
Description
16 bits without sign Range: 0.. 65535
32 bits without sign Range : 0 .. 4294967295
16 bits
1 ascii character (value in low byte of the register)
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
2 ascii characters (value in low byte of the register)
ASCII
Compacted bit (Bit to 1 activated indication)
Bit 0 : Error in ADC converter
Bit 1 : Non critical error
16 bits without sign
Bit 2 : Critical error
Bit 3 : Protection in service
Bit 4 to 15 : Non used
Value : Associated command
0 : Command 0
16 bits without sign 1 : Command 1
...
n : Command n
16 bits without sign Range : 0 .. 59999
Bit 0 to 7 : Minutes (Value between 0 and 59)
16 bits
Bit 8 to 15 : Hours (Value between 0 and 23)
Bit 0 to 7 : Day (Value between 1 and 31)
16 bits
Bit 8 to 15 : Month (Value between 1 and 12)
Bit 0 to 7 : Year (Value between 0 and 99)
16 bits
Bit 8 to 15 : Value 0, non used
Compacted bit (Bit for 1 activated digital signal)
Bit 0 : Digital signal 0
16 bits

PD300 User Manual
170
MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

Name Format
F16
16 bits
F17
16 bits
F18
16 bits
F19
16 bits
Description
Compacted bit (Bit for 1activated digital signal)

PD300 User Manual
171
MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

Name Format
F20
16 bits
F21
16 bits
F22
80 bits
Description
Bit 2 : Digital signal 82..
Analogue value (value in internal units)
MEA:=CP 16{OV, ER, Res, VALUE, S}
with
OV:=BS 1[1] not used(always <0>)
ER:=BS 1[2] <0..1>
<0>:=VALUE valid
<1>:=VALUE not valid
Res:=BS 1[3] not used always<0>)
VALUE:= F 12[4..15] <0..+1-2-12>

S:=BS 1[16]
<0>:=VALUE positive
<1>:=VALUE negative
The overflow bit (Overflow, OV) is not used and it is set to "0". In case of VALUE overflow it is set to
its maximum positive value, 4,905. The maximum of VALUE can be 1.2 or 2.4 times the nominal
value .
Digital change structure (5 words)
IDC + Binary time
Byte 0..1: Change identifier
IDC:=CP 16{IDENTIF, CHANGE}
IDENTIF:=UI 10[1..10] <0..1023>
CHANGE:=BS 6{Res, V, E, v, e}
with
Res:=
BS 2[11..12] not used (always <0>)
V:=
BS 1[13] <0..1>
<0>
:=
Valid state
<1>
:=
Non-valid state
E:=
BS 1[14] <0..1>
<0>
:=
State at "0" after the change
<1>
:=
State at "1" after the change
v:=
BS 1[15] <0..1>
<0>
:=
Validation bit V has not changed
<1>
:=
Validation bit V has changed
e:=
BS 1[16] <0..1>
<0>
:=
State bit E has not changed
<1>
:=
State bit E has changed
Byte 2..8: Binary time in 7 octets.
CP56Time2a:=CP 56{Milliseconds, Minutes, Res1, Invalid, Hours, Res2,Summer schedule, Day of
the month, Day of the week, Month, Res3, Year, Res4}
Byte 9 : Not used
(For more details consult the section about request of digital signal changes)

PD300 User Manual
172
IEC 870-5-101 RTU PROTOCOL
APPENDIX IX. IEC 870-5-101 RTU PROTOCOL

This function allows communicating with a telecontrol centre, by jeans of using the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol at
the level of control messages.
The unit behaves as a RTU remote centre.
The format per character is the following:
1 start bit.
8 information bits.
1 parity bit configurable between none, even and odd parity.
1 stop bit, configurable between 1 and 2 stop bits. The baud rate will be configurable among 400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and
38400 bauds.
IX.1. SETTINGS
Console text
Display text
Link address
LINK ADD.
Application address
APLICD. ADD.
Balanced mode
BALANCED
Baud rate
BAUDS
Channel type
T.CHANNEL
Parity
PARITY
Stop bits
STOP BITS
RTS/CTS Control
RTS_CTS
CTS activation waiting

time(csec)
CTS WAIT T.
Carrier waiting time(csec) CAR. WAIT T.
RTS waiting time(csec)
RTS ACT. T.
RTS deactivation time

(csec)
RTS DEACT. T.
Meaning
It allows identifying the number of the remote station at a link level. Value between 0
and 65534.
Default value 1.
It allows identifying the number of the remote station at an application level. Value
between 0 and 65534.
Default value 1.
It indicates if the communication is established in a balanced mode (1) or not (0).
Default value 1.
This Word-type parameter allows defining the bud rate.
Possible values: 0-38400, 1-19200, 2-9600, 3-4800, 4-2400, 5-1200, 6-300 bauds.
Default value 2.
This Word-type parameter allows selecting the available communication channel.
0-Direct
1-by telephone.
Default value 0.
It allows selecting the parity to be used in the communication.
0 Even parity
1 No parity
2 Odd parity.
Default value 0.
It allows selecting the number of stop. Bits.
0 - 1 stop bit.
2 - 2 stop bits.
Default value 0.
It allows selecting if RTS and CTS pin control is carried out
0 - No.
1 Yes.
Default value 0.
It indicates the time in which the function waits for the CTS activation, after the RTS
activation (in csec). Value between 0 and 1000.Default value 0.
It indicates the time that has to be waited until the transmission starts, once the CTS is
activated, with the aim of stabilising the carrier (in csec).Value between 0 and 500.
Default value 0.
Waiting time until transmission after having received (in csec). Value between 0 and
500.
Recommended values:
600 bauds - 4 csec.
1200 bauds - 3 csec.
2400, 4800 and 9600 bauds - 2csec.
Default value 0.
Waiting time until RTS deactivation after transmission (in csesc). Value between 0 and
500.
Recommended values:
600 bauds - 4 csec.
1200 bauds s - 3 csec.
2400, 4800 and 9600 bauds - 2cseg.

PD300 User Manual
173

Console text
Display text
Response waiting time

(csec)
RESP WAIT. T
Minimum time between

transmissions(csec)
T.BETWEEN.TX
Transmission number
TRANSM No.
Address Field of the

Link
LONG.DIR_A
Cause of Transmission
LONG.COT
Information Object
Address
LONG.IOA
Time format
TIME FORMAT
Measurements with time
MEASUREMENT T.
Counters with time
COUNTER T.
Simple signal address
SP ADDRESS
Event address
EV ADDRESS
Double signal address
DP ADDRESS
Measurement address
MEAS. ADDRESS
Tap address
TAP. ADDRESS
Counter address
CON. ADDRESS
Bitstrings address
BIT. ADDRESS
C Simple orders address
OC ADDRESS
C0 Simple orders
address
OC0 ADDRESS
C1 Double order address
OC1 ADDRESS
C2 double order address
C2 ADDRESS
Meaning
Default value 0.
Waiting Timeout until receiving received message confirmation (in csec). Value between
1 and 500.
Default value 100.
Minimum time that must elapse between two consecutive transmissions.(in csec). Value
between 1 and 100.
Recommended values:
600 and 1200 bauds - 2 csec.
2400 bauds 3 csec
4800, 9600 and 19200 bauds - 5csec.
38400 bauds 6 csec.
Default value 6.
Ii indicates the number of times a sent message is transmitted to a central centre, in

case confirmation is not received. Value between 0 and 5.
Default value 2.
Number of bytes in the Address Field of the Link. Value between 1 and 2.
Default value 2.
Number of bytes in the Cause of Transmission Field. Value between 1 and 2.
Default value 1.
Number of bytes in the Information Object Address Field. Value between 1 and 3.
Default value 3.
Time format to be used in the chronological times.
0 no time
1 3 bytes. Format CP24time2a
Default value 1.
It indicates if in the change message in the analogue measurements, the time in which
the change has occurred is sent (1) or not (0).
Default value 0.
It indicates if in the counter spontaneous frozen message, the time in which the frozen
has occurred is sent (1) or not (0).
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object type SP or simple signal. Value between 0 and
65535.
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object type EV or event. Value between 0 and 65535.
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object type DP or double signal. Value between 0 and
65535.
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object type MEAS or analogue measurement. Value
between 0 and 65535.
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object type TAP or transformer tap. Value between 0 and
65535.
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object counter type. Value between 0 and 65535.
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object bitstring type. Value between 0 and 65535.
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object C type simple order type. Value between 0 and
65535.
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object C0 type simple order type. Value between 0 and
65535..
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object C1 type double order type. Value between 0 and
65535..
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object C2 type double order type. Value between 0 and

PD300 User Manual
174

Console text
Display text
Meaning
65535.
Default value 0.
Address of the first information object measurement parameter type. Value between 0
Measurement parameter
and 65535.
PAR ADDRESS
address
Default value 0..
System information signal address with the change queue full. Value between 0 and
Queue full indication
65535.
FULL ADDRESS
address
Default value 0..
System information signal address with the change queue full at the percent indicated
Queue half-full indication
HALF-FULL ADDRESS in the setting X_PC_LL. . Value between 0 and 65535.
address
Default value 0..
System information signal address with the indication of GPS installed in the system.
Value between 0 and 65535.
GPS indication address
GPS ADDRESS
Default value 0.
System information signal address with the indication that the system is correctly
GPS synchronised
SYNCHR. ADDRESS synchronised by GPS. Value between 0 and 65535.
indication address
Default value 0.
Change queue capacity for which a fulling alarm is given ( in %). Value between 0
and100.
Queue fulling (%)
% FULLING
Default value 80
Change queue capacity for which the previous alarm is deactivated (in %). Value
between de 0 and 100.
Queue emptying (%)
% EMPTYING
Default value 20.
The event state refreshing start word in the digital signal status buffer (in %). Value
between e0 and 128.
Event refreshing position EVENT WORD
Default value 128 (in case of no events).
Command or order execution mode.
Mode 1 (0) direct execution
Mode 2 (1) selection previous to the execution.
Mode 3 (2) simple order and writings in direct execution and double orders
and regulation commands with previous selection.
Command execution mode COMMAND MODE
Mode 4 (3) simple order and writings with previous selection and double
orders and regulation commands in direct execution.
Mode 6 (5) simple order with previous selection. These simple orders
contemplate the OFF/ON treatment. That way, it is not allowed to have other type orders.
Default value Mode 6.
It indicates if the return information associated to the commands is sent or if the
Activation Ending message is used for the orders.
Mode 1 (0) no return information either ACTTERM
Mode 2 (1) SENT AS return information and ACTTERM
eturn command
COMMAND INF
Mode 3 (2) Return information is sent to all the orders and ACTTERM only for
information usage
analogue writings
Mode 4 (3) ACTTERM message is sent for all the commands. Default value
Mode 4.
Mode 1 (0) they are automatically frozen with the request
Mode 2 (1) they are not automatically frozen with the request
Counter freeze
FREEZE
Mode 3 (2) they are frozen in each spontaneous periodical and in the
initialization as invalid.
Default value Mode 3.
It indicates if the measurement parameters have the same address as their
Measurement parameter
measurements (1) or they have their own address. In this case, its start address is given
MEAS_PAR ADD.
by the setting D_OD_PAR (0).
address
Default value 1.
It indicates if the 101 profile used is the 101 Meta Reduced Profile.
META PROFILE
Default value 0.
It indicates if the system has the GPS installed.
GPS
GPS
Default value 0.
Transmission factor time, in order to correct the time received in the synchronization
message, due to delays in its sending (in cesc).
Time correction factor
TRANSM. FACT.
Value between 0 and 1000.
Default value 0.
Maximum number of bytes the asdu can have. Value between 50 and 255.
ASDU maximum size
ASDU SIZE
Default value 255.
It indicates if the messages have to be sent compacted during the general interrogation
SQ bit usage
SQ BIT USE
process (1) or not (0).

PD300 User Manual
175

Console text
Display text
Broadcast synchronization
response
SYNCHRO. RESP.
Cyclical measurement
period (min)
MEAS.PERIOD
Meaning
Default value 1.
It indicates if the Activation Confirmation message sending of the synchronization
command has to be inhibited when this is sent with broadcast address. At1, this
message is not sent.
Default value 0.
Period in minutes of the cyclical measurement sending. Value between 0 and 60. UIT
value 0, measurements are not sent.
Default value 0.
IX.2. TABLES
The screens have to be set with the data base to be sent to the central centre via Protocol 101, in the communication
console. These setting screens are the following ones:
Digital signals 101 configuration

In this table the simple and double signalling type signals are introduced and also bitstring signal in case they are available.
The following fields must be defined:
NUMBER 101: Signal number indicating in which position of the STATE buffer its corresponding bit is going to be
refreshed. They are numbered from 1 to 2048 possible signals.
For simple signals, it starts in 1 and the following ones are consecutive, and in case of existing gaps they must not be
introduced.
For events, given the start Word of the event state refreshing in the STATE buffer, the first value of the NUMBER field
hast to be calculated with this Word given by PO_EV.
first event: PO_EV x 16 + 1
The following ones are consecutive, and in case of existing gaps they must not be introduced.
For double signals, indications of open, close, undetermined and discordant status will be given, but, as they only have
two bits to indicate the state of a double signal, the undetermined and the discordant states take the same number as
the closed state, refreshing the corresponding bits as 00 and 11 respectively.
This field NUMBER for double signals is calculated from the variable PO_DP, having that the first double signal will have in
the NUMBER field the same value as the one resulting from calculating:
PO_DP x 16 + 1, for the open state
PO_DP x 16 + 2, for the close state, undetermined and discordant.
being PO_DP a Word number between 0 and 127, which locates the double signals between the events and the bitstrings and
it indicates the start word of the refreshing of the double digital signal states.
If in the database there are events, the operation to calculate start Word of the double signals is the one below:
PO_DP = PO_EV + (no. of events - 1) / 16 + 1
If there is no event, most habitual case, this parameter is calculated from the simple signals:
PO_DP = (no. of simple signals - 1) / 16 + 1
For the first Bitstring 32 signals will be available (1 per every bitstring bit) and so 32 registers with the NUMBER
fields.
PO_ BITS x 16 +1 .............................. PO_BITS x 16 + 32

being PO_BITS a word number between 0 and 127, locating the bitstrings as the last element to be refreshed in the buffer
after the double signals.
In order to calculate this word, the same explained for double signals is applied. In order to calculate how much the double
signal occupy, take into account that each signal needs two bits, so that in each Word only 8 double signals are refreshed.
The operation to calculate the start word of the bitstrings is the following one:

PD300 User Manual
176

PO_BITS = PO_DP + (no. Of double signals - 1) / 8 + 1
The only thing to take into account the size in words of the previous signals inside the buffer.
BD SIGNAL: It indicates the signal number in the database of the PD300.
NELEM: It indicates the element number inside those of its type.
For simple signals, it coincides with the NUMERO field.
For events, it must continue as if they were simple signals, because internally they are treated in the same way. If between
the last simple signal and the first event there is a step in the numeration, it has to be observed in this field.
For double signals, it mist start in 1 again. If, in case of double signals, several registers have been refilled with the
different signals status, open, close, undetermined and discordant, these registers belong to the same signal, so the
NELEM fields has to be the same for all of them.
The same will occur in the case of the Bitstring, which have 32 registers of the table with the same field NELEM.
REVERSE: it indicates if the reverse signal state is waited.
TYPE: It indicates the signal 101 type:
TYPE
0
1
2
ELEMENT TYPE
Simple signalling type element
Double signalling type element
Bitstring type element
CIN: It indicates the incidence code for double signals

CIN
0
1
2
3
4
INCIDENCE INTERNAL CODE

Simple signalling or bitstring value change
Signalling value change to open
Signalling value change to close
Signalling value change to undetermined
Signalling value change to discordant
101 measurement configuration

In this table the measurement of normalized, scaled and tap type. The following fields have to be defined:
NUMBER 101: Number of measurement respecting the protocol 870-5-l01. They start numbering from 1 up to 128 possible
measurements. In case of sags in the database, those registers must not be introduced in the table.
BD MEASUREMENT: It indicates the measurement number in the database of the PD300.
DEADBAND: Magnitude of the change in the measurement in order to be sent to the canter. A value higher than the 1% of
the background scale is recommended.
For type 2 measurements, this field is not taken into account because any change in this type of measurements will be sent
to the centre.
PERIOD: Time during which a change in a signal must be maintained in order to be sent to a centre. It will be given in
hundredths of seconds.
LOW: Low limit under which a measurement will be sent to the centre as alarm.
For type 2 measurements, this field is not taken into account because any change in this type of measurement will be sent to
the centre.
HIGH: High limit over which a measurement will be sent to the centre as alarm.
For type 2 measurements, this field is not taken into account because any change in this type of measurement will be sent to
the centre.
In the case of the limits, both high and low, we do not pay attention to the change magnitude, but in the limits of a zone. If it
exceeds from the zone given between the high and low limits, they are sent to the centre, although it is very small. In the
same way, it had previously exceeded, the value of the measurement has a value between the limits again.

PD300 User Manual
177

BACKGROUND: Scale background for scales measurements, real engineering value corresponding to the measurement
maximum value (4095 counts).
If spontaneous changes in measurements are not desired to be sent, it is recommended to set value of the LOWLIM field to
its minimum value, -4095, and HIGHLIM and BTRATA to its maximum value, which are 4095 and 8190 counts,
respectively.
TYPE: measurement 101 type:
0 Single-direction measurement.- F16. TYPE Normalized
1 - Two-direction measurement. - I16. TYPE Scaled
2 - Direct measurement - TAP. Transformer tap
The measurements in this table are in a rising order according to its type, that is, firstly the normalized, the scales and last
the taps.
101 counter configuration

In this table the normalized, the scaled and the tap type measurements are introduced. The following fields have to be
defined.
NUMBER 101: Counter number respecting the protocol 870-5-l01. They start numbering from 1 up to 64 possible
measurements. In case of sags between the counters in the database, those registers must not be introduced in the table.
COUNTER BD: It indicates the counter number in the database of the PD300
PERIOD: Spontaneous frozen period and sending of the periodical counter. The period, in minutes, for the counter
accumulation will be divisor of 60 minutes. A 15-minute value is recommended for the counter period. All the counters that
are desired to send to the centre in a cyclical way have to have the same period different to zero in the PERIOD field.
If the counter periodical sending is not desired to be treated, the PERIOD field has to be set to zero.
GROUP: Group the counter for the counter request by groups belong to.
If the counters do not have an assigned group, since the central centre does not use the counter request by groups, the
GROUP field must be set to zero, so only the counter period will appear.
More than 4 different groups are not allowed for the counters in the database counters.
101 order configuration

The following fields have to be defined foe each order:
101 NUMBER: Information object address (IOA) of the order in the protocol IEC 870-5-101.
ORDEN BD: Order in the database of the PD300
ON / OFF: Status ON / OFF of the order
TYPE: Type of element over which the return information is received
0 Simple signal
1 Double signal
SIGNAL: Inside of those f this type for the return information. This information is the same as the NELEM field of the signal
tables.
STATE: This field has different meaning depending on the order type.
In the case of simple orders, it indicates the end state of the signal the order is associated to, simple or double.
In the case of double orders, it indicates if the expected state has to come reversed or not.
If the setting Command Execution Mode is at value Mode 6, the simple orders must be introduced in the table as double
orders respecting the information object address that corresponds to them as simple signals. That is, they are introduced as
simple orders but taking into account in this STATE field that they are treated as double orders.

PD300 User Manual
178

TIMING: It indicates the timing in hundredths of seconds, which have to be waited until the return information associated to
the order, is received.
Signal and measurement group 101 Configuration

If the interrogation by groups wants to be enabled, the following fields should be defined for each group:
GROUP: Group number. This number can be any from 1 to 16. they do not have to be consecutive and there can be gaps.
IOA START: This field contains the information object address of the first group element. This address have to be a signal or
measurement valid signal.
IOA END: This field contains the information object address of the last group element. . This address have to be a signal or
measurement valid signal and it must be of the same type as the address of the first element.
In the case of Meta Reduced profile, the Measurement Interrogation as group 16 is used, so this group will have to be
configured in the table.
IX.3. INTEROPERABILITY PROFILE IEC 870 5 101

The IEC 870 5 101 protocol profile, implemented in the protection PD300, is defined bellow, by marking with a the
parameters selected among those in the parameter set and alternatives indicated by he standard.
IX.3.1 System or device (specific parameter of the system)
System definition
Control station definition (Master
Control station definition (Master
IX.3.2 System configuration (system specific parameter)
Point-to-point
Multipoint-party line
Multiple point-to-point
Multpoint-star
IX.3.3 Physical layer (system specific parameter)

Baud rate (control address)
Unbalanced
interchange
circuit
V.24/V.28 Standard
Unbalanced
interchange
circuit
V.24/V.28
Recommended if >
1200 bit/s
Balanced Interchange Circuit X.24/X.27
100 bit/s
200 bit/s
300 bit/s
2 400 bit/s
4 800 bit/s
2 400 bit/s
4 800 bit/s
9 600 bit/s
600 bit/s
19 200 bit/s
1 200 bit/s
38 400 bit/s
9 600 bit/s
56 000 bit/s
64 000 bit/s
Baud rate (monitor address)

PD300 User Manual
179
Unbalanced
Interchange
Circuit
V.24/V.28 Standard
Unbalanced
Interchange
Circuit
V.24/V.28
Recommended if >
1200 bit/s
Balanced Interchange Circuit X.24/X.27
100 bit/s
2 400 bit/s
2 400 bit/s
56 000 bit/s
200 bit/s
4 800 bit/s
4 800 bit/s
64 000 bit/s
300 bit/s
9 600 bit/s
9 600 bit/s
600 bit/s
19 200 bit/s
1 200 bit/s
38 400 bit/s
IX.3.4 Link layer (system specific parameter)

The mesh FT 1.2 format, the simple character and the fixed time out interval are exclusively used in this standard.
Link Transmission Procedure
Address Field of the Link
Balanced transmission
Not present (balanced transmission only)
Unbalanced transmission
One octet
Two octets
Frame Length
Structured
255
Maximum length L (control direction)
Unstructured
255
Maximum length L (monitor direction)
When the non-balanced link layer is used, the following ASDU types are return as class 2 messages (low priority) with the
following transmission causes:
ASDU Standard assignation to class 2 messages is used as follows:
Identification type
Transmisin cause
9, 11, 13, 21
<1>

PD300 User Manual
180
A special ASDU assignation to class 2 messages is used as follows:
Identification type
Transmisin cause
1, 3, 5, 7
<5>, <20 36>
9, 11
<1>, <3>, <5>, <20 36>
15, 16, 37, 132
<37 41>
10, 12, 34, 35, 131
<3>
45, 46, 100, 101
<7>, <10>
102
<5>
47, 48, 49, 104, 105, 110, 111, 113
<7>
IX.3.5 Application layer

Transmission mode for application data
Mode 1 (first of all the least significative byte), as it is defined in the clausule 4.10 of the IEC 870-5-4, is exclusively
used in standard.
ASDU common address (system specific parameter)
One octet
Two octets
Information object address (system specific parameter)
One octet
Structured
Two octets
Unstructured
Three octets
Transmission cause (system specific parameter)
One octet
Two octets (with originator address)

PD300 User Manual
181
ASDUs Standard selection

Process information in the monitor address (station specific parameter)
<1>
:=
Single-point information
M_SP_NA_1
<2>
:=
Single-point information with time tag
M_SP_TA_1
<3>
:=
Double-point information
M_DP_NA_1
<4>
:=
Double-point information with time tag
M_DP_TA_1
<5>
:=
Step position information
M_ST_NA_1
<6>
:=
Step position information with time tag
M_ST_TA_1
<7>
:=
Bitstring of 32 bit
M_BO_NA_1
<8>
:=
Bitstring of 32 bit with time tag
M_BO_TA_1
<9>
:=
Measured value, normalized value
M_ME_NA_1
<10>
:=
Measured value, normalized value with time tag
M_ME_TA_1
<11>
:=
Measured value, scaled value
M_ME_NB_1
<12>
:=
Measured value, scaled value with time tag
M_ME_TB_1
<13>
:=
Measured value, short floating-point value
M_ME_NC_1
<14>
:=
Measured value, short floating-point value with time tag
M_ME_TC_1
<15>
:=
Integrated totals
M_IT_NA_1
<16>
:=
Integrated totals with time tag
M_IT_TA_1
<17>
:=
Event of protection equipment with time tag
M_EP_TA_1
<18>
:=
Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag
M_EP_TB_1
<19>
:=
Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time

tag
M_EP_TC_1
<20>
:=
Packed single-point information with status change detection
M_PS_NA_1
<21>
:=
Measured value, normalized value without quality descriptor
M_ME_ND_1
<30>
:=
Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a
M_SP_TB_1
<31>
:=
Double-point information with time tag CP56Time2a
M_DP_TB_1
<32>
:=
Step position information with time tag CP56Time2a
M_ST_TB_1
<33>
:=
Bitstring of 32 bit with time tag CP56Time2a
M_BO_TB_1
<34>
:=
Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a
M_ME_TD_1
<35>
:=
Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a
M_ME_TE_1
<36>
:=
Measured value,
CP56Time2a
<37>
:=
Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a
M_IT_TB_1
<38>
:=
Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a
M_EP_TD_1
<39>
:=
Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag

CP56Time2a
M_EP_TE_1
short
floating
point
value
with
time
tag
M_ME_TF_1

PD300 User Manual
182
<40>
:=
Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with

time tag CP56Time2a
M_EP_TF_1
<128>
:=
Single-point information with time tag CP40Time2a
M_SP_TB_1
<129>
:=
Double-point information with time tag CP40Time2a
M_DP_TB_1
<130>
:=
Step position information with time tag CP40Time2a
M_ST_TB_1
<131>
:=
Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP40Time2a
M_ME_TD_1
<132>
:=
Integrated totals with time tag CP40Time2a
M_IT_TB_1
Process information in the control address (station specific parameter)
<45>
:=
Single command
C_SC_NA_1
<46>
:=
Double command
C_DC_NA_1
<47>
:=
Regulating step command
C_RC_NA_1
<48>
:=
Set point command, normalized values
C_CE_NA_1
<49>
:=
Set point command, scaled value
C_SE_NB_1
<50>
:=
Set point command, short floating-point value
C_SE_NC_1
<51>
:=
Bitstring of 32 bit
C_BO_NA_1
System information in the monitor address (station specific parameter)
<70>
:=
End of initialization
M_EI_NA_1
System information in the control address (station specific parameter)
<100>
:=
Interrogation command
C_IC_NA_1
<101>
:=
Counter interrogation command
C_CI_NA_1
<102>
:=
Read command
C_RD_NA_1
<103>
:=
Clock synchronization command
C_CS_NA_1
<104>
:=
Test command
C_TS_NB_1
<105>
:=
Reset process command
C_RP_NC_1
<106>
:=
Delay acquisition command
C_CD_NA_1
Parameters in the control address (station specific parameter)
<110>
:=
Parameter of measured value, normalized value (threshold only)
P_ME_NA_1
<111>
:=
Parameter of measured value, scaled value
P_ME_NB_1
<112>
:=
Parameter of measured value, short floating-point value
P_ME_NC_1
<113>
:=
Parameter activation
P_AC_NA_1
File transfer (station specific parameter)
<120>
:=
File ready
F_FR_NA_1
<121>
:=
Section ready
F_SR_NA_1
<122>
:=
Call directory, select file, call file, call section
F_SC_NA_1

PD300 User Manual
183
<123>
:=
Last section, last segment
F_LS_NA_1
<124>
:=
Ack file, ack section
F_AF_NA_1
<125>
:=
Segment
F_SG_NA_1
<126>
:=
Directory
F_DR_TA_1
Type identifying and assigned transmission causes (station specific parameter)

Type identification
Transmission cause
1
10
11
12
13
20
to
36
37
to
41
<1>
M_SP_NA_1
<2>
M_SP_TA_1
<3>
M_DP_NA_1
<4>
M_DP_TA_1
<5>
M_ST_NA_1
<6>
M_ST_TA_1
<7>
M_BO_NA_1
<8>
M_BO_TA_1
<9>
M_ME_NA_1
<10>
M_ME_TA_1
<11>
M_ME_NB_1
<12>
M_ME_TB_1
<13>
M_ME_NC_1
<14>
M_ME_TC_1
<15>
M_IT_NA_1
<16>
M_IT_TA_1
<17>
M_EP_TA_1
<18>
M_EP_TB_1
<19>
M_EP_TC_1
<20>
M_PS_NA_1
<21>
M_ME_ND_1
<30>
M_SP_TB_1
<31>
M_DP_TB_1
<32>
M_ST_TB_1
<33>
M_BO_TB_1
<34>
M_ME_TD_1
<35>
M_ME_TE_1
<36>
M_ME_TF_1
<37>
M_IT_TB_1
<38>
M_EP_TD_1
<39>
M_EP_TE_1
<40>
M_EP_TF_1
<45>
C_SC_NA_1
<46>
C_DC_NA_1
44
45
46
47

PD300 User Manual
184

Type identification
Transmission cause
1
10
11
<47>
C_RC_NA_1
<48>
C_CE_NA_1
<49>
C_SE_NB_1
<50>
C_SE_NC_1
<51>
C_BO_NA_1
<70>
M_EI_NA_1
<100>
C_IC_NA_1
<101>
C_CI_NA_1
<102>
C_RD_NA_1
<103>
C_CS_NA_1
<104>
C_TS_NB_1
<105>
C_RP_NC_1
<106>
C_CD_NA_1
<110>
P_ME_NA_1
<111>
P_ME_NB_1
<112>
P_ME_NC_1
<113>
P_AC_NA_1
<120>
F_FR_NA_1
<121>
F_SR_NA_1
<122>
F_SC_NA_1
<123>
F_LS_NA_1
<124>
F_AF_NA_1
<125>
F_SG_NA_1
<126>
F_DR_TA_1
<128>
M_SP_TB_1
<129>
M_DP_TB_1
<130>
M_ST_TB_1
<131>
M_ME_TD_1
<132>
M_IT_TB_1
12
13
20
to
36
37
to
41
44
45
46
47
IX.3.6 Application basic functions

Station initialization (station specific parameter)
Remote initialization remota
Data cyclical transmission (station specific parameter)
Data cyclical transmission
Reading procedure (station specific parameter)
Reading procedure

PD300 User Manual
185
Spontaneous transmission (station specific parameter)
Spontaneous transmission
Double transmission of information objects with spontaneous transmisin cause(station specific

parameter)
The following element types can be transmitted in a succession caused by a simple state change in an information
object. The information object particular addresses for which the double transmission is enabled are defined in a
specific list of the project.
Single point information M_SP_NA_1, M_SP_TA_1, M_SP_TB_1 and M_PS_NA_1
Double point information M_DP_NA_1, M_DP_TA_1 and M_DP_TB_1
Step position information M_ST_NA_1, M_ST_TA_1and M_ST_TB_1
Bitstring of 32 bit M_BO_NA_1, M_BO_TA_1, M_BO_TB_1
Measured value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1, M_ME_TA_1, M_ME_ND_1 and M_ME_TD_1
Measured value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1, M_ME_TB_1 and M_ME_TE_1
Measured value, short floating point number M_ME_NC_1 and M_ME_TC_1
General interrogation (station or system specific parameter)

The information object addresses assigned to each group must be shown in a separate table.
Global
Group 1
Group 7
Group 13
Group 2
Group 8
Group 14
Group 3
Group 9
Group 15
Group 4
Group 10
Group 16
Group 5
Group 11
Group 6
Group 12
Clock synchronization (station specific parameter)
Clock synchronization
Command transmission (station specific parameter)
Direct command transmission
Select and execute command
Direct set point command transmission
Select and execute set point command
C-SE ACTTERM Used
No additional definition
Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the controlled station)
Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the controlled station)
Persistent output

PD300 User Manual
186
Integrated total transmission (station or object specific parameter)
Mode A: local freeze with spontaneous transmission
Mode B: local freeze with counter interrogation
Mode C: freeze and transmit by counter interrogation commands
Mode D: freeze by counter interrogation command, frozen values reported spontaneously
Counter read
General request counter
Counter freeze without reset
Request counter group 1
Counter freeze with reset
Counter reset
Addresses per group have to be defined
Parameter load (object specific parameter)
Threshold value
Smoothing factor
Low limit for transmission of measured value
High limit for transmission of measured value
Parameter activation(object specific parameter)
Act/deact of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
Test procedure (station specific parameter)
Test
File transfer (station specific parameter)

File transfer in monitor address
Transparent file
Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment
Transmission of sequence of events
Transmission of sequence of recorded analogue values
File transfer in control address
Transparent file
Background scan (station specific parameter)
Background scan
Acquisition of transmission delay (station specific parameter)
Acquisition of transmission delay

PD300 User Manual
187
IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
APPENDIX X.
The IEC870-5-103 communication module implemented in the protection unit allows the communication as a slave station with
the master centre through the communication rear port (RS232, RS485 or Optical Fibre)
X.1. 870-5-103 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL FUNCTION

The module implements the communication protocol, based in the IEC60870-5-103, in the protection, in order to
communicate with a primary centre which has the protocol IEC60870-5-103 implemented. Its objective is collecting oscillo
data, protection signalling and measurements, as well as receiving commands or orders.
The transmission and reception mesh formats are set to the FT1.2 mesh format explained in section 6.2.4.2 of IEC 870-5-1
standard.
The format per character:
1 start bit.
8 information bits
1 parity bit, selectable between without parity or even parity
1 stop bit, selectable between 1 and 2 stop bits.
The baud rate will be selected among, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400.
The communication is carried out through the communication rear connector (RS232, RS485 or Optical Fibre).
In the same way the following functions are implemented:
Initialization.
Clock synchronization.
General interrogation
General commands
Perturbation data transmission.
The implemented functions are described in the standard IEC870-5-103. The application layer is based in the international
standards IEC 870-5-3 (general structure of application data), IEC 870-5-4 (Definition and coding of the application
information elements), IEC 870-5-5 (Application basic functions).
The basic ASDUS implemented are described in the document IEC870-5-103 and they are:
ASDUs Compatible in Secondary to Primary direction.

<1> Message with time label.
<2> Message with time label and relative time.
<5> Identification.
<6> Clock synchronization.
<8> General interrogation end.
<9> Measurements II. With a variable number of measurements.
<23> Stored perturbation list.
<28> Ready for the perturbation digital signal transmission.
<29> Digital signal transmission.

PD300 User Manual
188

<30> Perturbation value transmission.
<31> Transmission end
ASDUs Compatibles en Direccin de Primario a Secundario.

<6> Clock synchronization.
<7> General interrogation start.
<20> General commands.
<24> Perturbation data transmission command.
<25> Perturbation data transmission acknowledge
X.2. SETTINGS
Associated text
LCU ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY T.
STOP BITS
RTS.ACT T
CARRIER T.
RTS DEAC T.
SENDING FORMAT
Meaning
It allows the identification of the number of the remote station. Value between 0 and 254.
Default value 1.
This word-type parameter allows fixing the baud rate: 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200
- 38400 bauds.
Default value 9600
It allows the selection of the parity type to be used during the transmission. Even, odd or without
parity
The recommended default value is even, according to the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
It allows the selection of the stop bit number. 1 or 2 stop bits
The recommended default value is 1 stop bit according to the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
RTS activation waiting time. Waiting time after receiving a message and before activating the RTS
signal for transmission. Value between 0 and 2000(milliseconds).
Carrier stabilization waiting time. Waiting time once the RTS signal is activated and before
transmitting the first message character. Value between 0 and 2000(milliseconds).
RTS deactivation waiting time. Waiting time after the transmission of a message and before
deactivating the RTS signal. Value between 0 and 2000(milliseconds).
Sending format: Compatible or extended. 0->compatible VDEW. 1->Extended private range.
In compatible format :
Control signals configured as compatible are only sent
Only three measurements are sent in the measurement ASDU
Commands configured as compatible are only accepted
For the correct operation of the perturbation data request function, the communication with the Procome console must be
carried out through the front port. In the ' Oscillo configuration' screen, in the OSCILLO COMMUNICATION MODE section,
you can choose between:
-->25.
-->maximum.
25 must be selected.

PD300 User Manual
189
X.3. CONTROL SIGNALS

The control signals can be configured according to the console screen:
BD SIGNAL: It allows selecting the control signal within those existing in the unit.
TYP: Function Type.
INF: Information Number.
GI: It shows if the signal is included in the response to a general question. If this option is not selected, the changes
generated by the signal are only activation changes.
REVERSE: It reverses the signal state.
X.4. CONTROL ANALOGUE MEASUREMENTS

The control analogue measurements can be configured according to the console screen:
BD MEASUREMENT: It allows selecting a measurement from the data base.

NUMBER: It shows the position in the measurement ASDU.
This table is only valid when the SENDING FORMAT setting is in EXTENDED.
X.5. COMMANDS
The commands can be configured according to the console screen:
BD ORDER: It allows selecting an order from the BD

TYP: Function Type.
INF: Information Number.
DCO: It allows selecting from On and Off

PD300 User Manual
190
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
APPENDIX XI. IEC 61850 PROTOCOL

XI.1. INTRODUCTION
This protocol, implemented in the protection devices, is based on the communication protocol defined in the IEC 61850
standard and described in the following documents:
IEC61850-1: Introduction and overview

IEC61850-2: Glossary
IEC61850-3: General requirements
IEC61850-4: System and project management
IEC61850-5: Communication requirements for functions and device models
IEC61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations related to IEDs
IEC61850-7: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment
IEC61850-7-1: Principles and models
IEC61850-7-2: Abstract communication service interface (ACSI)
IEC61850-7-3: Common Data Classes
IEC61850-7-4: Compatible logical node classes and data classes
IEC61850-8: Specific communication service mapping (SCSM)
IEC61850-8-1: Mappings to MMS (ISO/IEC9506-1 and ISO/IEC 9506-2)
IEC61850-9: Specific communication service mapping (SCSM)
IEC61850-9-1: Sampled values over serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link
IEC61850-9-2: Sampled values over ISO/IEC 8802-3
IEC61850-10: Conformance testing
The Technical Committee 57 of the IEC (CT57) is in charge of developing and maintaining such standard. There is a
corporation called UCA User Group which works very closely to this Technical Committee and which assist the customers and
manufacturers in the integration of device owning this protocol. Ingeteam T&D is a member of this corporation.
The IEC 61850 standard defines some basic aspects: the local area network (LAN ethernet), communication protocols (TCPIP, MMS), the modeling of the substation elements and services (using XML language) as well as the engineering tools. The
architecture of an IEC 61850 system changes from master/slave to client/server.
One of the most remarkable aspects of the IEC 61850 standard is the use of horizontal messages between protection devices.
These messages called GOOSE (which are a subgroup of GSE: Generic Substation Event) can substitute physical wirings
between devices.
The use of XML language to describe the different elements and services of the substation is also a remarkable characteristic
of this protocol. The icd/cid files based on the XML are those files that describe the data model and services of a protection
and those that we will refer to all along this appendix.
The particular implementation characteristics of this protocol are described in the PICS, MICS, TICS and PIXIT documents
defined in the standard conformity test part
In conclusion, the protection device behaves as a IEC 61850 data and service server. All the information, together with its
organization is defined in an icd/cid configuration file (based on XML). All those protocol characteristics that can be conferred
to a IEC 61850 server according to this standard, can be applied.

PD300 User Manual
191
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
XI.2. PREVIOUS STEPS TO CONFIGURE THE DEVICE

Each protection device is defined with a configuration file, with ICD extension (IED Capability description) in which all the
data and services (capabilities) supported in the protection is described. This file is supplied with the device.
This icd file has to be configured to be particularized and to be able to communicate with the IEC 61850 client of each
substation. Apart from introducing the communication part, the private ones (PIXIT), DataSets and Reports to be sent to each
client have also to be configured. Once this particularization has been done, the file changes into a CID file (Configured IED
Description), with which the device is completely configured for its integration in a certain substation.
In order to carry out all these steps and configure an IEC 61850 protection, Ingeteam T&D has developed a SW tool called
eFS (Energy Factory Suite). The eFS is a software tool for the IEC 61850 system automation which has multiple modules that
will be used to configure each substation protection devices;
The software module that will be used to configure the device in each substation is the pacFactory. The other modules
include in the eFS are not necessary.
The complete protection icd file particularization, to change it into a configured file (cid) is carried in some steps. These
steps will basically allow us:
To communicate with the IEC 61850 client (HMI local, remote, RTU).
To serve data and services (synchronization, orders) to the different customers of the substation. Peer-to-peer
horizontal communication between protection units (GOOSEs).
Protection setting.
Others
By using the pacFactory modules, the protection will be easily configured, to be integrated within each IEC 61850
substation.
The steps would be the following:
1.
Create and activate a project: From welcome window by clicking on Project Factory button you can create and activate a
project.
2.
Select an IED: Created and activated the project, the button start is enabled opening the IEDs list configured in the
project. By clicking on Continue button or double click on IED selected, access the environment configuration.
If this is the first time you access to project (there will be no IED in the list). It will be necessary to import.

PD300 User Manual
192
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
XI.2.1 IED Import to project

To import an IED to project, you have two options;
Import the IED from file; for this option is not necessary to communicate with any device.
Import the IED from device; automatic detection of network devices.
If you select this button
you detect all network devices. And the following window appears.
The first thing to consider is to check the device is between subnet ranges to communicate properly.
For this, you need to add the subnet device to PC network card or change the IP address device for belonging to the
same network PC. This last option is probably faster and easier.
To change the IP address from any device, select on list and by clicking on Change IP button, fill the new IP and
new mask to configure and send to device. Refresh automatic detection to confirm the change and then you will work
properly. After check the communication with the device, by clicking on Import IED to DB lets you load an IED to
project.
From both options, import from file or from device, you get the dialog window show below.
Fill device family and select/ create voltage level and bay and click on Import button to finish.

PD300 User Manual
193
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
XI.3. PROTECTION CONFIGURATION

XI.3.1 IED Properties
If you just import an icd file, probably you need to update the communication data (IP address, mask and OSI
parameters).
For this, from main menu, on tools option IED properties, or from toolbar button on icon
following window with different tabs.
will appear the
Select AP1 tab and fill the communication parameters necessary for IED configuration.
The IP address and the status communication with device are shown on the application status bar. Ej.;
XI.3.2 Communications
You can access to IEC 61850 configurations from left menu on Configuration option or from top menu.
When the tab IEC 61850 Server is opened, on the left side of the application the tree view with the model data from
device is shown.
T
This tree view shows the different logical devices (LDs) and the different logical
nodes (LNs) within each.
IEC 61850 standards, the configuration data sending by device (Reports or Goose
messages) is performed in two steps:
First, you have to define the Dataset which you send in the Report or
Goose message.
Second, you have to configure the Report Control Block (R.C.B) or Goose
Control Block (G.C.B.) where all the characteristics of each report or goose message
are.
According to IEC 61850 standards, Datasets and Control Block are created on LN
level, so first, select the LN level where you want to create it.
If there is no LN selected, buttons for the Datasets, Report control blocks and
transmission Gooses configuration will be disabled.

PD300 User Manual
194
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL

Once Datasets, Report Control Blocks or transmission Gooses are configured, will be shown as branches on the LN.
On the IEC 61850 Server configuration tab you have:
A toolbar with the following options:
Dataset: Open the Dataset configuration dialog box.
R.C.B: Open Report Control Blocks configuration dialog box.
GOOSEs: Open the transmission Goose message configuration dialog box.
GoosesRx: Open reception Goose message configuration dialog box.
Collapse/Expand: Collapse or expand the dataset list on tab.
Data grid with dataset:

o
The data grid shows the information group by Datasets.
In each Dataset row are the Report Control Block and Gooses associated with that Dataset.
Other access for Dataset configuration;
By rightclicking on child nodes in tree view, a contextual menu will appear:

o
On LN node allows:
Open the Dataset and Goose configuration dialog box.
Create a new Dataset and new Goose.
Properties: Open configuration dialog box.
Delete: Only enabled if not have any control block associated.
On Dataset allows:
On Report Control Block allows:

Delete.

PD300 User Manual
195
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
On Goose Control Block allows:
Delete.
From data grid rows:

o
On Dataset row allows:
Delete: Only enabled if not have any control block associated.
Create a new Dataset and new Goose.
On Report Control Block row allows:
Delete.
On Goose Control Block row allows:
Delete.
XI.3.3 Datasets
By clicking on Dataset (1) button configure the members of Dataset selected or define a new Dataset.

PD300 User Manual
196
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
By using the Edit button, the members to be inserted in each Dataset can be selected (both at basic and FCD level,
selecting it in the filter on the tool bar).
Criteria used in the configuration of:
To configure DataSets for Report messages is recommended to use the filter Functional Constrain. With
this filter is included in the DataSet the data reference, which will be an structure including the data status,
quality and timestamp.
To configure DataSets for Goose messages is recommended to use the filter Basic Type. With this filter is
included in the DataSet the data attributes references independently. This is because in Goose messages the
data timestamp is not sent.
The FC (Functional Constrain) used for the Reports and Gooses messages are:
ST: Para configuracin de seales
MX: Para configuracin de medidas.

PD300 User Manual
197
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
XI.3.4 Report Control Blocks (RCB)

The Report control block associated to a Dataset, will be configured by selecting the LLN0 node of the protection and
clicking on the RCB.
A dialog box to configure is as show below
You define or configure an existing RCB. It is also possible to configure the Dataset which is associated to, and also
the trigger options and optional fields of each RCB, as well as if it is buffered or unbuffered.
XI.3.5 Goose Control Blocks (GOCB)

The transmission goose control blocks are configured in the same way as the RCBs. By clicking on GOOSEs button a
dialog box appears as show bellow.
In this section you configure the details and the Access Point of the Goose, which contains the MAC-Multicast the
gooses are sent to (as well as the VLAN and AppID parameters).

PD300 User Manual
198
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
XI.3.6 Goose Subscription

In order to configure the reception gooses, we have to import the IED which will publish the GOOSEs we want to
subscribe to. So, run the iedFactory and import IEDs using the cid configuration files (which must have the
transmission GOOSE configured). Lets have an example of goose subscription (publisher and subscriber in the same
project):
1.
Select the subscriptor IED and open the configuration IEC 61850 Server in pacFactory application.
2.
To create a new subscription GOOSEs publish by any protection imported in the project, click on
GooseRx button.
3.
The subscription dialog box appears and you can select the publisher GOOSE control block we want to
subscribe to. Select it and by clicking on left arrow button will appear in the subscriptions list. To finish,
accept the subscription with the Accept button.
4.
To check the subscription, navigate to line1 IED, in the LD GOOSERx or in LLN0 node. You have to see a
Dataset and a GOCB that match with the GOCB of the protection (check it with the properties option).

PD300 User Manual
199
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
XI.3.7 Settings
The protection settings can be initialized through substation Factory application.
These initializations are written down in a cid file which will be sent to the protection that will consider them as initial
settings.
Every time a protection setting is changed from any interface (display, console, IEC 61850 customer or any other), the
cid file is updated with the new value. The configuration file (cid) with the last setting values of the protection can
always be retrieved through the FTP or through the IEC 61850 file service.
Must be taken into account when a cid is sent, the protection will update settings with the new coming data in this cid
file.
XI.3.8 Commands
The commands accepted by the protection are configured and mapped in the device (factory settings). Commands are
configured with the control service direct operate with normal security

PD300 User Manual
200
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
XI.3.9 Private parts

To finish with the IED particularization, the private data, which allow configuring the LOG system, have to be checked,
and offset has to be given to the local time, and enable the storage of the oscillography/faults/settings in a file etc.
Insert private part
These private data leave the factory with default values and, depending on the needs, they are usually modified. The
list of the parameters that can be configured and their meaning are the following:
Maximum number of connections: it is the maximum number of MMS connections that are allowed
simultaneously. It has a maximum of 6.
Log file: configuration of the LOG file. Each active bit indicates where the unit debug information is going to be
dumped.
Local Time: Deviation of the local time regarding the UTC, positive or negative value of such deviation. If at 0,
the local time coincides with the UTC.
Configurator: IP port for the communication with the configurator. If this field is not filled, it has a default value
(49200).
Order mode: special mode where the order locking are not checked before executing them. If at 1, the lockings
are not checked.
Time Out Aplic: Indicates the time, in seconds, that must elapse without receiving any information through port
102 (MMS) before the server closes the connection. This value is used to avoid that connections that have
stopped sending data during an indicated time (when a possible error) are still occupying an open connection of
the server. .
Telnet: indicates the TCP port through which the de Log information is taken out when this log is active.
Parsing: how restrictive we want the parsing is. With a value different to zero. It checks that there is enough
space for the writing of the setting values in the icd. In case there is no enough space, the icd is not validated
Refresh time: after an order, the opClsOr and opOpnOr signals take some values regarding the state of the order.
With Refreshing time, we indicate the time after which, once the order is received, we set the value of such
signals at zero. The time will be in seconds.
It can be also chosen if you want to store the oscillos, faults and settings in files, inside the unit file system, by
selecting the ConfDomain tab.
oscillos/faults/settings
configuration tab

PD300 User Manual
201
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
XI.4. PROTECTION UPDATE

Once all the configuration steps have been carried out in the pacFactory, this configuration has to be uploaded into the IED.
For that, we will use Sending through FTP button.
By clicking on FTP sending button will appear a dialog box where you must fill the user name and the password, then click
Upload and select the path to save the cid file (you need it later on).
The unit is reset and starts with the new configuration after some minutes (depending on the data and service model sent).
This time is needed because the device is self-configured from this cid file (no change into proprietary or binary format is
done).

PD300 User Manual
202
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
APPENDIX XII. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

The self-checking constantly performed by the unit, can detect the following situations:
Critical hardware error
Error in the converter reference voltage
Error in the converter
Error in the FLASH memory recording
Error in the relays activation
Error in the SPI communication (between micro and DSP)
Non critical hardware error
Clock synchronization error
HW error corrected
In the event of any failure detection, the alarm will remain until the failure is disappeared. This alarm can be visualised through:
Status screen
Control events
Events
Digital outputs
Led
XII.1. FAILURE DETECTION

The failure detection can happen in various ways.
Status screen

PD300 User Manual
203
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
In the section Protection status (marked on the picture), we can find the situation in which is currently the protection,
through four signalisations:
Protection in service
Critical error
Non critical error
Error in ADC converter
By normal functioning, only the signalisation (in red) for protection in service must be on. Any of the other 3 signalisations
indicate an unusual situation.
Control signals
If the hardware status signal (digital signal HW status from the section List of available signals, Appendix III) is by 0, this
indicates that some unusual situation has appeared (critical error) in the unit. By 1 it indicates Hardware OK.
Digital outputs
A digital output can be programmed with the signal HW status, which will be activated by normal functioning and deactivated by critical error. If the opposite logic is desired, this can be done through the programmable logic signals.
Leds
The programmable Leds count with the same options as the digital outputs.
The non programmable bicolour Led (OK/F) indicates:
Correct functioning if green
Critical error detection if red
Events
As well as indicating if the error is or not critical, the events also indicate the type of error detected and they are the ones
quoted in the first part of this chapter.
XII.2. ERROR HANDLING PROCEDURE

The procedure will depend on the detected error and the unit status.
The HW errors corrected event indicates that the appeared problems have been resolved.
If the unit is off, check that the power supply is correct. If the unit is well supplied, contact the technical service.
If the unit is on but shows failure, return to the events screen and check which type of error it is:
If critical error, with no specific indication, is shown and the error persists after turning the unit off and on, contact the
technical service.
If converter or reference voltage error is shown. Check the Measurements, and if correct turn off and on the unit; if the
error does not disappear, contact the technical service.
If Clock error is shown, synchronize manually. If the error persists, contact the technical service.
If error in the Flash memory recording is shown, send the settings again. If error persists contact the technical service.

PD300 User Manual
204
APPENDIX XIII. RECEPTION TESTS

XIII.1. MATERIAL NEEDED
Three-phase voltage and current generator unit with variable frequency of type <0.5.
Chronometer unit with pick up by voltage or current injection with <0.001s accuracy
Wiring.
Vdc power supply +-10% (Vdc depending on the model).
XIII.2. MEASUREMENT TESTS

The measurement range is up to 1.2 times the nominal value (5 A). The error made in this range must be lower than the
0.5% of 1.2*nominal value
The error made in the protection range must be lower than the al 3% of the introduced value.
The worker decides the points to check but those below are recommended:
Current (A)
0,5
1
5 (nominal)
10
50
Voltage(V)
20
50
65 (aprox. nominal)
80
XIII.2.1 Measurements in display

The measurements will be made by injecting voltages and currents in a phase and checking in the display that only
this phase presents a value different to 0 and that it is inside the defined ranges.
Besides, it is important to take into account that the measurements in secondary and primary values (multiplied by the
transformation ratio of the measurement transformer) must appear in the display.
XIII.2.2 Measurements in Console

The measurements will be made by injecting voltages and currents in a phase and checking in the display that only
this phase presents a value different to 0 and that it is inside the defined ranges.
Besides, it is important to take into account that, in the Consoles; the measurements in secondary values in the state
screen, and in primary values in the measurement and control screen (multiplied by the transformation ratio of the
measurement transformer)
This test must be carried out for all the phases and the measurements will be seen in the console.
XIII.3. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

XIII.3.1 Hardware status
Checking, with the relay off, that the output contact DO10 (HW status) is close. Feed the relay checking that this
contact opens.
Besides, when turning on the unit, led no.8 must be kept in green. (HW status)

PD300 User Manual
205
XIII.3.2 Instantaneous units (current, voltage, frequency)

This protocol can be used for any current and voltage instantaneous type device, the unit has. The most usual ones are
the following ones.
Phases overcurrent Instantaneous
Neutral overcurrent Instantaneous
Phases overvoltage Instantaneous
A testing unit prepared to measure tipping times will be used to carry out all these tests
Disable the corresponding timed function and all the functions that are not being tested.
Pick-up and dropout during the trip

The instantaneous additional time will be set to 0 sec.
They will be tested by making I, V increasing slopes (depending on the unit that is being tested) from 90% up to
110% of the setting, making a note of the value for which the instantaneous picks up. When reaching the moment of
the trip, you must stay for a while in it checking that there is no dropout and that it remains tripped.
A decreasing slope will be carried out to the drop-out point taking note of this value. The worker decides the points to
check but those below are recommended:
Current (A)
6
10
20
40
Voltage (V)
50
65
80
In order to check the undervoltages, the slopes will be reverse. First the decreasing slope to pick up and then the
increasing one to drop out.
Check that when tripping the corresponding digital outputs and LEDs are activated. After each test, make a " Fault
Acknoweledge to turn off the LEDs..
Instantaneous trip speed

It is a question of testing the speed with the relay trips when the tripping time is 0. So the instantaneous additional
time will be set to 0 sec.
It will be tested by giving a higher value than the set pick-up (2 times for current, 1.2 times for voltage) making notes
about the time the instantaneous picks up.
In order to carry out this test a chronometer picked up by the signal injection and stopped by the tripping relay
operation.
Suggested setting values: Those of the pick-up and drop out.
The tripping time must be lower than 50 ms.
Instantaneous trip with additional

The same as the previous one, for different settings of the additional time, making notes of the time in which the
instantaneous trips. The error must not exceed the 5% of the programmed time or 50 ms (the highest one)
Function locking test

Check that if the input programmed as locked is activated there are no trips in the corresponding function (this is the
same for any function).
XIII.3.3 Timed units (current, voltage)

This protocol is useful for any unit of current and voltage timed unit. The most usual are the following ones:
Phase overcurrent timing
Neutral overcurrent timing

PD300 User Manual
206

A testing unit prepared to measure tipping times will be used to carry out all these tests
Disable the corresponding instantaneous function and all the functions that are not being tested.
Pick-up and drop-out

The test will be carried out in a similar way to the instantaneous one. The tripping curve type will be set as one of fixed
time and with a 0 tripping time
Check that when tripping the corresponding digital outputs and LEDs are activated. After each test, make a " Fault
Acknoweledge to turn off the LEDs
Fixed time
The test will be carried out in a similar way to the instantaneous one
Curve tripping time

The test will be carried out in the same way as that for the fixed time, but setting the timing unit with some curve
types and the different indexes that are shown in the Appendix II, where the theoretical operation times are indicated.
The time measurements will be repeated for different points of the tripping curve and for different settings according
to the worker opinion.
XIII.3.4 Current unbalance units

These units work to exceed the I2 threshold (Negative sequence current)
The test will be the same as those for the instantaneous and phase timing, but current will be injected in the three
phases with a definite values.
Phase protection units must be disabled.
Picks-up
The test will be the same as those for the instantaneous and phase timing
The tripping time must be set to the minimum (0.1sec) and if it is a time unit set the time curve to fixed time.
Currents from the same module, which have a 120 phase difference with the values appearing in the tables below,
are injected. Then phase A is being increased until the protection trips. Each current increase must last at least 0.1
seconds in order to have time to trip.
IR
120
120
120
IT
IS
When it trips the tripping I2 will be calculated to see the error made in the following way:
I2.trip(s)=(|IRtrip|-|Ifixed|)/3
The tests must be repeated for different fixed C and for different setting. The recommended settings are the following
ones:
I2=I reverse seq fixed
1
2
4
Fixed current
3
5
10

PD300 User Manual
207
Tripping times
The procedure is the same as the one for the instantaneous and unbalance timing. For timing, the reverse time curves
will be checked.
Currents from the same module, which have a 120 phase difference with the values appearing in the table below, are
injected. The time the protection takes to trip is timed.
XIII.3.5 Residual current units

These units work to exceed the I0 threshold (Negative sequence current)
The test will be the same as those for the instantaneous and phase timing, but current will be injected in the three
phases with a definite values.
Phase protection units must be disabled.
Picks up
The timing unit and the instantaneous one are checked in the same way.
The tripping time must be set to the minimum (0.1seg) and if it is a timing unit, set the time curve to fixed time.
Currents from the same module, which have a 120 phase difference with the values appearing in the tables below,
are injected. Then phase A is being increased until the protection trips. Each current increase must last at least 0.1
seconds in order to have time to trip.
When tripping the trip I0 will be calculated to see the error made in the way below::
I0.trip (s)=(|IRtrip|-|Ifixed|)/3
The same test must be repeated for the different Ifixed and for the different settings. But the following settings are
recommended:
I0=reverse set seq current
1
2
4
Fixed current
3
5
10
Tripping times
The procedure is the same as the one for the instantaneous and unbalance timing. For timing, the different reverse
time curves will be checked.
Currents from the same module, which have a 120 phase difference with the values appearing in the table below, are
injected. The time the protection takes to trip is timed.
XIII.4. COIL SUPERVISION

It is an automatism formed by 4 inputs and 2 outputs by each winding.
Input
Output
Trip circuit with open breaker Trip circuit failure
Trip circuit with close breaker Close circuit failure
Close circuit with open breaker
Close circuit with close breaker
When the breaker is closed, if the Close circuit with close breaker input is deactivated, after 20 seconds it must give a
close circuit failure, activating that output. If then the input is activated, after 20 seconds the failure output must be
deactivated
When the breaker is closed, if the Trip circuit with close breaker input is deactivated, after 20 seconds it must give a trip
circuit failure, activating that output. If then the input is activated, after 20 seconds the failure output must be deactivated

PD300 User Manual
208

When the breaker is open, if the Close circuit with open breaker input is deactivated, after 20 seconds it must give a close
circuit failure, activating that output. If then the input is activated, after 20 seconds the failure output must be deactivated.
When the breaker is open, if the Trip circuit with open breaker input is deactivated, after 20 seconds it must give a trip
circuit failure, activating that output. If then the input is activated, after 20 seconds the failure output must be deactivated.
XIII.5. DISPLAY AND CLOCK TEST

Feed the relay. Check that the two-colored led Ok/F is green. In the display the following texts must appear:
PD300 Protection
Winding no.
Xx
n is the unit number of windings.
Xx defines the firmware version. Pushing INTRO the following message must appear.
SEE TIME
Pushing INTRO the unit time will appear again. Check that the second digits change..
DATA ##-##-##
TIME ##-##-##
Turn off the unit and wait for a minute. Return to See time and check that the time is now 1 minute ahead than when it
turned off. It means that the battery is OK.
Push ESC. You must see
SEE TIME
Push ESC. You must see
PD300 protection
Winding no.
Xx
XIII.6. UNIT TIME SETTING

Push the button Synchronize that appears at the top of the Status screen of the Protection Console. There will appear a
window with the PC time and date.
Push OK and check if the relay accepts the data/time sent.

PD300 User Manual
209
20BRECEPTION,
STORAGE,
INSTALLATION
TESTS108
Parque
Tecnolgico
de Bizkaia AND
Edificio
48170 Zamudio, Bizkaia, Spain
Tel +34 94 601 8900
Fax +34 94 601 8901
ingeteamtd@ingeteam.com
Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution, S.A.

PD300 User Manual
www.ingeteam.com
210

Ume Pd300 Eng

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Ume Pd300 Eng

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

PD300 MULTIFUNCTION PROTECTION

UME_PD300_eng Rev.: R (03/11)

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ..........................................................................................................................................7

Manual scope ....................................................................................................................................................7

Constructive characteristics. Horizontal box (PD300H)......................................................................................... 22

3. UNIT CONFIGURATION ..........................................................................................................................................30

Programming of digital AND LOGICAL inputs ...................................................................................................... 30

4. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS. DESCRIPTION AND SETTINGS ....................................................................................... 40

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

Control messages .............................................................................................................................................67

7. OPERATION MODE ................................................................................................................................................70

Reception and storage ......................................................................................................................................74

DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT CALCULATION .......................................................................................... 76

I.1. 2-winding models ............................................................................................................................................77

GENERATOR PROTECTION ............................................................................................................... 82

KEYBOARD/ DISPLAY .......................................................................................................................84

CURVES FOR TIMED CHARACTERISTICS ......................................................................................... 111

IV.1. Curves CEI 255-4./.BS142 ........................................................................................................................... 111

LIST OF AVAILABLE SIGNALS......................................................................................................... 135

V.1. Digital signals ............................................................................................................................................... 135

LOGIC DIAGRAMS .......................................................................................................................... 142

DNP 3.0 RTU PROTOCOL ............................................................................................................... 154

VII.1. Settings ..................................................................................................................................................... 154

MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL ......................................................................................................... 161

VIII.1. Protocol characteristics .............................................................................................................................. 161

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

IEC 870-5-101 RTU PROTOCOL...................................................................................................... 173

IX.1. Settings ...................................................................................................................................................... 173

IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL ......................................................................................................... 188

870-5-103 Communication Protocol Function ................................................................................................. 188

IEC 61850 PROTOCOL ................................................................................................................... 191

XI.1. Introduction................................................................................................................................................. 191

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................................... 203

XII.1. Failure detection ......................................................................................................................................... 203

RECEPTION TESTS ................................................................................................................... 205

XIII.1. Material needed ......................................................................................................................................... 205

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

1.1 MANUAL SCOPE

Functions 2 winding model and generator

Functions only in generator

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

1.3 MODEL CODING

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

1.4 USER INTERFACE

1.5 HARDWARE CONFIGURATIONS

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

Power supply nominal voltage

Current transformer measurement range

Number of digital inputs/outputs

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

Measurement range of the current transformers

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

IEC255-5, series C (2 kV, 1 minute)

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

1.7.2 Environmental tests

s/ IEC 68-2-1 (-40C)

1.7.3 Mechanical tests

s/ IEC 255-21-1 class I

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.

1.8 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Wiring diagram example.

Ingeteam Transmission & Distribution S.A.